21_WD_OM_EN_USC
FIRST EDITION
2021 DODGE DURANGO OWNER’S MANUAL
©2020 FCA US LLC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. TOUS DROITS RÉSERVÉS.
DODGE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF FCA US LLC OR FCA CANADA INC., USED UNDER LICENSE. DODGE EST UNE MARQUE DÉPOSÉE DE FCA US LLC OU FCA CANADA INC., UTILISÉE SOUS LE PERMIS.
APP STORE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF APPLE INC. GOOGLE PLAY STORE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF GOOGLE.
Whether it’s providing information about specic product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an
accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll nd the app an important extension of your Dodge brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search
keyword “Dodge” (U.S. residents only).
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE
OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS
U. S. Canada
2021 DODGE DURANGO
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to
chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the
engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently
when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include
a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its
products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-800-423-6343 (U.S.) or
1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and
Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian
residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and
personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road.
Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you nd yourself
unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of
cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Dodge brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source
for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local
Dodge brand dealer.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels
far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use
public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................................. 8
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................................. 14
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ........................................................85
4 STARTING AND OPERATING ...............................................................................................106
5 MULTIMEDIA ................................................................................................................................ 171
6 SAFETY ....................................................................................................................................... 200
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .................................................................................................... 257
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................... 279
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................ 335
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................342
11 INDEX .............................................................................................................................................347
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
Symbols Key............................................................ 9
ROLLOVER WARNING ........................................... 9
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.........10
Symbol Glossary...................................................10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ......................................................................14
Key Fob......................................................... 14
SENTRY KEY .........................................................16
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................17
Keyless Enter ‘n Go — Ignition .................... 17
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .........................19
How To Use Remote Start ...........................19
To Exit Remote Start Mode ......................... 20
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped ................................................... 20
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped ................................................... 21
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer
Activation — If Equipped.............................. 21
Remote Start Cancel Message —
If Equipped ................................................... 21
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ... 22
To Arm The System...................................... 22
To Disarm The System ............................... 22
Rearming Of The System............................. 23
Security System Manual Override .............. 23
Tamper Alert................................................. 23
DOORS .................................................................. 23
Manual Door Locks...................................... 23
Power Door Locks........................................ 24
Keyless Enter ‘n Go — Passive Entry ......... 24
Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature —
If Equipped................................................... 27
Automatic Door Locks —
If Equipped................................................... 27
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors .................................................. 27
STEERING WHEEL ................................................ 28
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering
Column — If Equipped ................................ 28
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering
Column — If Equipped ................................ 28
Heated Steering Wheel —
If Equipped .................................................. 29
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED... 29
Programming The Memory Feature............ 30
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Key Fob To Memory ........................... 30
Memory Position Recall............................... 31
SEATS.....................................................................31
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) —
If Equipped................................................... 31
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ............... 33
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) —
If Equipped .................................................. 36
Power Passenger Seat Adjustment —
If Equipped................................................... 38
Heated Seats — If Equipped ...................... 39
Front Ventilated Seats —
If Equipped................................................... 40
Head Restraints........................................... 40
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION ......................43
Introducing Uconnect .................................. 43
Basic Voice Commands .............................. 43
Get Started................................................... 43
Additional Information................................. 44
MIRRORS ..............................................................44
Inside Rearview Mirror ................................ 44
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors .......................... 45
Outside Mirrors ........................................... 45
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors —
If Equipped................................................... 45
Power Mirrors .............................................. 45
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped..................... 46
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped ... 46
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) ......................................................46
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink® .................................................. 47
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels........47
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device .............. 47
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage
Door Opener................................................. 48
Programming HomeLink® To A
Miscellaneous Device..................................49
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink®
Button...........................................................49
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming..... 49
EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................50
Multifunction Lever...................................... 50
Headlight Switch ......................................... 50
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) ................. 51
High/Low Beam Switch ............................... 51
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped..........51
Flash-To-Pass ...............................................51
Automatic Headlights .................................52
Parking Lights And Panel Lights .................52
Automatic Headlights With Wipers ............. 52
Headlight Delay............................................ 52
Lights-On Reminder..................................... 52
Fog Lights — If Equipped .............................52
Turn Signals .................................................53
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ............. 53
Battery Saver................................................53
INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................ 53
Courtesy Lights ............................................ 53
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS............. 55
Windshield Wiper Operation ...................... 55
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ........... 56
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...................... 57
CLIMATE CONTROLS............................................ 57
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions .............................................. 57
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ....... 64
Climate Voice Recognition .......................... 64
Operating Tips ............................................. 64
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ............. 66
Storage ......................................................... 66
USB/AUX Control ........................................ 69
Electrical Power Outlets .............................. 70
Power Inverter — If Equipped...................... 72
Wireless Charging Pad —
If Equipped .................................................. 73
WINDOWS ............................................................ 74
Power Windows............................................ 74
Wind Buffeting ............................................ 75
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED .................... 75
Opening And Closing The Sunroof.............. 76
Sunshade Operation.................................... 76
Pinch Protect Feature.................................. 76
Venting Sunroof ........................................... 77
Sunroof Maintenance.................................. 77
Ignition Off Operation .................................. 77
HOOD......................................................................77
Opening The Hood....................................... 77
Closing The Hood......................................... 77
LIFTGATE................................................................78
Power Liftgate — If Equipped ...................... 78
Cargo Area Features ................................... 79
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED .............81
Deploying The Crossbars ............................ 81
Stowing The Crossbars................................ 83
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .......................................85
Instrument Cluster Descriptions................. 85
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY .......................86
Location And Controls ................................. 87
Engine Oil Life Reset .................................. 88
Display And Messages ................................ 89
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ... 90
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped ................................. 93
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ..................95
Red Warning Lights ..................................... 95
Yellow Warning Lights ................................. 98
Yellow Indicator Lights ..............................101
Green Indicator Lights...............................102
White Indicator Lights ...............................103
Blue Indicator Lights .................................103
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ... 103
Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity................................104
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ........................................................ 104
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE..................................... 106
Automatic Transmission............................106
Normal Starting .........................................106
AutoPark.....................................................107
If Engine Fails To Start ..............................109
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F
Or −30°C) ..................................................110
After Starting..............................................110
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ....... 110
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ...... 110
PARKING BRAKE .............................................. 111
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION............................ 112
Ignition Park Interlock ...............................113
Brake Transmission Shift Interlock
(BTSI) System.............................................114
Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode........................114
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission.......114
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED.......................... 120
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION .......................120
Single-Speed Operating Instructions/
Precautions— If Equipped .........................120
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Two-Position Switch) —
If Equipped.................................................120
Shifting Procedure.....................................122
TOW N GO — IF EQUIPPED ................................123
Guidelines For Track Use ..........................123
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ONLY —
IF EQUIPPED .......................................................125
POWER STEERING .............................................125
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED............125
Autostop Mode...........................................125
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop .....................................................126
To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode...........................................................126
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System........................................................127
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System........................................................127
System Malfunction...................................127
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED .. 127
Cruise Control — If Equipped ....................128
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) —
If Equipped ................................................130
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ..................... 140
ParkSense Sensors ...................................141
ParkSense Display.....................................141
ParkSense Warning Display......................144
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........144
Operation With A Trailer ............................144
Service The ParkSense Park Assist
System........................................................145
Cleaning The ParkSense System..............145
ParkSense System Usage Precautions....145
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ........................... 146
LaneSense Operation................................146
Turning LaneSense On Or Off ...................147
LaneSense Warning Message..................147
Changing LaneSense Status.....................149
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ............ 149
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ................................. 151
VEHICLE LOADING ............................................ 151
Certification Label .....................................151
TRAILER TOWING .............................................. 152
Common Towing Definitions.....................153
Trailer Hitch Classification ........................155
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) ........................................156
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal —
If Equipped.................................................157
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
Trailer And Tongue Weight .......................157
Towing Requirements ...............................158
Towing Tips ................................................163
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME) ................................................... 164
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle ........................................................164
Recreational Towing — Rear-Wheel Drive
Models........................................................164
Recreational Towing — All Wheel Drive
Models (Single-Speed Transfer Case) ......165
Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive
Models (Two-Speed Transfer Case)..........165
DRIVING TIPS ..................................................... 168
On-Road Driving Tips .................................168
Off-Road Driving Tips.................................168
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ....................................... 171
CYBERSECURITY ............................................... 171
UCONNECT SETTINGS ....................................... 172
Customer Programmable Features ..........172
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ............ 189
Radio Operation.........................................189
Media Mode ...............................................189
UCONNECT REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
(RSE) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .........................189
Getting Started ..........................................189
Dual Video Screen .....................................191
Play A Blu-ray™ Disc ..................................191
Play Video Games......................................193
Important Notes For Dual Video Screen
System........................................................193
Blu-ray™ Disc Player Remote Control.......194
Headphones Operation .............................195
Controls ......................................................195
Replacing The Headphone Batteries .......195
Accessibility — If Equipped........................196
Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty.....................................................196
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES ....199
Regulatory And Safety Information...........199
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES.............................................200
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................200
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...201
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS.........................206
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
If Equipped.................................................206
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation ...................................................210
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)...213
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ................. 216
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....216
Important Safety Precautions...................216
Seat Belt Systems ....................................217
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)...225
Child Restraints .........................................238
SAFETY TIPS ...................................................... 254
Transporting Passengers ..........................254
Transporting Pets .....................................254
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ................................................254
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle...................................255
Exhaust Gas...............................................256
Carbon Monoxide Warnings......................256
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...................... 257
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED.... 257
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ...................... 261
Preparations For Jacking ..........................261
Jack Location .............................................262
Spare Tire Stowage ...................................262
Spare Tire Removal ...................................263
Jacking Instructions ..................................264
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
JUMP STARTING ................................................ 268
Preparations For Jump Start.....................268
Jump Starting Procedure...........................269
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED ....271
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ......................... 271
MANUAL PARK RELEASE ................................. 272
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ............................ 274
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ....................... 275
Rear Wheel Drive Models..........................277
All Wheel Drive Models..............................277
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS) ................................................. 278
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)....................... 278
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING .................................. 279
Maintenance Plan......................................280
ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................. 283
3.6L Engine ................................................283
5.7L Engine ................................................284
Checking Oil Level......................................285
Adding Washer Fluid .................................285
Maintenance-Free Battery .......................285
Pressure Washing......................................286
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE....................................286
Engine Oil ..................................................286
Engine Oil Filter..........................................287
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ...........................287
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...................288
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ...............291
Body Lubrication........................................291
Windshield Wiper Blades ..........................292
Exhaust System ........................................295
Cooling System ..........................................296
Brake System ............................................299
Automatic Transmission............................300
Front/Rear Axle Fluid ...............................301
Transfer Case ............................................301
Fuses ..........................................................302
Bulb Replacement .....................................309
TIRES....................................................................311
Tire Safety Information .............................311
Tires — General Information ....................320
Tire Types ...................................................324
Spare Tires — If Equipped .........................325
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ....................327
Snow Traction Devices ..............................328
Tire Rotation Recommendations .............330
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES .................................... 331
Treadwear ..................................................331
Traction Grades .........................................331
Temperature Grades .................................331
STORING THE VEHICLE .................................... 332
BODYWORK........................................................ 332
Protection From Atmospheric Agents.......332
Body And Underbody Maintenance..........332
Preserving The Bodywork..........................332
INTERIORS ......................................................... 333
Seats And Fabric Parts..............................333
Plastic And Coated Parts...........................334
Leather Surfaces .......................................334
Glass Surfaces ..........................................334
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ................ 335
BRAKE SYSTEM ................................................. 335
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS ...335
Torque Specifications................................335
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
FUEL REQUIREMENTS....................................... 336
3.6L Engine ...............................................336
5.7L Engine ................................................336
Reformulated Gasoline ............................336
Materials Added To Fuel ...........................337
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends......................337
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
Vehicles ......................................................337
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications...337
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline ..................338
Fuel System Cautions................................338
FLUID CAPACITIES............................................. 339
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................. 340
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ............... 341
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE ..........................................342
Prepare For The Appointment...................342
Prepare A List.............................................342
Be Reasonable With Requests .................342
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ...............................342
FCA US LLC Customer Center ...................342
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........342
Mexico ........................................................343
Puerto Rico And US
Virgin Islands..............................................343
Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired
(TDD/TTY)...................................................343
Service Contract .......................................343
WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................. 344
MOPAR PARTS................................................... 344
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ........................ 344
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. .......................................344
In Canada...................................................345
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ........................ 345
General Information.......................................... 346
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Dodge vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and
maneuvers differently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the
two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited
for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your
driving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome
the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Ú page 168.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance
of your vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC
offers to its customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications
carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help
ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated
in the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content
introduced throughout the Owner's Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording "If Equipped". All
data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of
the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For
further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Dodge best, have factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and
care about your satisfaction.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of
vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of
gravity than many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all
vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if this
vehicle is out of control, it may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving
actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this
vehicle safely may result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe
or fatal injury. Drive carefully.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major
cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the
universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by
WARNING!
These statements are against operating
procedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements are against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation,
operation, and reliability. If not followed, may
result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier
use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE
ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information
on a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
1
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two
million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the
definition of each symbol Ú page 86.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
Red Warning Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 95
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 95
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 95
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 96
Door Open Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 96
Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light
Ú page 96
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 96
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 97
Hood Open Warning Light
Ú page 97
Liftgate Open Warning Light
Ú page 97
Red Warning Lights
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 97
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 97
Speed Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 98
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
Ú page 98
Transmission Temperature Warning Light —
If Equipped
Ú page 98
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 98
Yellow Warning Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Light (MIL)
Ú page 98
Red Warning Lights
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning
Light
Ú page 99
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning
Light
Ú page 99
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 99
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
Ú page 99
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 100
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 101
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
— If Equipped
Ú page 101
Yellow Warning Lights
1
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning Light
— If Equipped
Ú page 101
Service AWD Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 101
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light —
If Equipped
Ú page 101
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 101
Service LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 101
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light —
If Equipped
Ú page 101
Yellow Indicator Lights
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 101
Yellow Warning Lights
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Low Indicator Light —
If Equipped
Ú page 101
NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 102
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 102
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without
Target Light — If Equipped
Ú page 102
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 102
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 102
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 103
Yellow Indicator Lights
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
13
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
Ú page 102
Snow Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 102
Sport Mode Indicator Light
Ú page 102
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 102
Tow Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 102
Green Indicator Lights
White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light —
If Equipped
Ú page 103
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
Ú page 103
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 103
1
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which
supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE), Keyless Enter ‘n Go (if equipped),
Remote Start (if equipped), and remote power
liftgate operation. The key fob allows you to lock
or unlock the doors and liftgate from distances
up to approximately 66 ft (20 m). The key fob
does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to
activate the system. The key fob also contains
an emergency key, which is stored in the rear of
the key fob.
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked
if the key fob is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop, or other electronic device.
This may result in poor performance.
With ignition in the ON position and the
vehicle moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE
commands are disabled.
Key Fob
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low
or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery
can be verified by referring to the instrument
cluster, which will display directions to follow
Ú page 346.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key
fob once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice
within five seconds to unlock all the doors and
the liftgate. To lock all the doors and the liftgate,
push the lock button once.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals
will flash and the illuminated entry system will
be activated. When the doors are locked, the
turn signals will flash and the horn will chirp.
1 — Unlock
2 — Liftgate
3 — Emergency Key
4 — Lock
5 — Remote Start
6 — PANIC
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
NOTE:
If the vehicle is unlocked with the key fob,
and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and the security system
will arm (if equipped).
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate
is open, the doors will lock. The doors will
unlock again automatically if the key is left
inside the passenger compartment, other-
wise the doors will stay locked.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the
first push of the unlock button within Uconnect
Settings Ú page 172.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The recommended replacement battery is one
CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a
battery obtained from Mopar. Aftermarket
coin battery dimensions may not meet the
original OEM coin battery dimensions.
Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate
for further information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are
on the back housing or the printed circuit
board.
1. Remove the emergency key (2) by sliding
the emergency key release (1) on the back
of the key fob and pull the emergency key
out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Separate the key fob halves using a #2 flat
blade screwdriver or a coin, and gently pry
the two halves of the key fob apart. Make
sure not to damage the seal during removal.
Emergency Key Removal
Separating Case With A Coin
1 — Emergency Key Release
2 — Emergency Key
2
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob Battery Replacement
3. Remove the back cover to access and
replace the battery. When replacing the
battery, match the (+) sign on the battery to
the (+) sign on the inside of the battery clip,
located on the back cover. Avoid touching
the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils
may cause battery deterioration. If you
touch a battery, clean it with rubbing
alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two
halves together.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by
an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be re-purposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
system serviced, bring all vehicle keys with
you to an authorized dealer.
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut
to match the vehicle locks.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed
or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed
to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off
in two seconds if an incorrect key fob is used to
start the engine.
After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN
position, the vehicle security light will turn on for
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates
that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the
bulb check, it indicates that someone used an
invalid key fob to start the engine. Either of
these conditions will result in the engine being
shut off after two seconds.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n
Go — Ignition, always remember to place
the ignition in the OFF position.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
If the vehicle security light turns on during
normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there
is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur,
have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by
an authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
electronics Ú page 346.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO — IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as long
as the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has several
operating modes that are labeled and will
illuminate when in position. These modes are
OFF, ACC, ON/RUN, and START.
START/STOP Ignition Button
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped
Some electrical devices (e.g. central locking,
alarm, etc.) are still available
ACC
Engine is not started
Some electrical devices are available (e.g.
power windows)
ON/RUN
Driving position
All the electrical devices are available (e.g.
climate controls, etc.)
START
The engine will start (when foot is on the
brake pedal)
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
1 — OFF
2 — ACC
3 — ON/RUN
2
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
NOTE:
If the ignition position does not change with a
push of the ignition button, and the instrument
cluster display message “Key Fob Not
Detected” is being displayed, the key fob may
have a low or depleted battery. In this situation,
a back up method can be used to operate the
ignition switch. Put the nose side of the key fob
(side opposite of the emergency key) against
the START/STOP ignition button and push to
operate the ignition switch.
Depleted Key Fob Battery Procedure
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the
automatic transmission into PARK and
apply the parking brake. Always make sure
the keyless ignition node is in the “OFF”
mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle
and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat
build-up may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always
remove the key fobs from vehicle, place the
ignition in the OFF position and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
NOTE:
For more information on normal starting
procedures, see Ú page 106.
When opening the driver's door with the igni-
tion in ON/RUN (engine not running), a chime
will sound to remind you to place the ignition
in the OFF position. In addition to the chime,
the message will display “Ignition Or Acces-
sory On” in the cluster.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start
the engine conveniently from outside
the vehicle while still maintaining
security. The system has a range of
328 ft (100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in
all ambient conditions before the driver enters
the vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob
may reduce this range Ú page 346.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on
the key fob twice within five seconds. The
vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights will
flash, and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start, and
the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start
mode for a 15 minute cycle. Pushing the
Remote Start button a third time shuts the
engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button,
and with a valid Keyless Enter ‘n Go key fob in
the vehicle, place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run
for 15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is
low, the vehicle will start and then shut down
in 10 seconds.
The park lamps will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window operation is
disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote
Start mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN
position before the Remote Start sequence
can be repeated for a third cycle.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
2
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
All of the following conditions must be met
before the engine will Remote Start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Liftgate closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not
pushed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
PANIC button not pushed
System not disabled from previous remote
start event
Vehicle Security system indicator flashing
Ignition in OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
Vehicle Security system is not signaling an
intrusion
Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote
Start system, either push and release the
unlock button on the key fob to unlock the
doors, or unlock the vehicle using Keyless
Enter ‘n Go — Passive Entry via the door
handles, and disarm the vehicle security
system (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of
the 15 minute cycle, push and release the
START/STOP ignition button.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off
with another push and release of the Remote Start
button on the key fob, or if the engine is allowed to
run for the entire 15 minute cycle. Once the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the
climate controls will resume the previously set
operations (temperature, blower control, etc.).
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the
system will disable for two seconds after
receiving a valid Remote Start request.
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter
‘n Go — Passive Entry feature, the message
“Remote Start Active — Push Start Button”
will display in the instrument cluster display
until you push the START/STOP ignition
button.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When remote start is active, and the outside
ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below,
the system will automatically activate front
defrost for 15 minutes or less. The time is
dependent on the ambient temperature. Once
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
the timer expires, the system will automatically
adjust the settings depending on ambient
conditions. See “Remote Start Comfort Systems
— If Equipped” in the next section for detailed
operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When remote start is activated, the front and rear
defrost will automatically turn on in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel and driver heated
seat feature will turn on if selected in the comfort
menu screen within Uconnect Settings
Ú
page 172. In warm weather, the driver vented
seat feature will automatically turn on when the
remote start is activated and is selected in the
comfort menu screen. The vehicle will adjust the
climate control settings depending on the outside
ambient temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
The climate controls will automatically adjust to
the optimal temperature and mode settings
depending on the outside ambient temperature.
This will occur until the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position where the climate controls will
resume their previous settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) —
If Equipped
In ambient temperatures at 40°F (4.5°C) or
below, the climate settings will default to
maximum heat, with fresh air entering the
cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the
vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C)
to 78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be
based on the last settings selected by the
driver.
In ambient temperatures at 78°F (26°C) or
above, the climate settings will default to MAX
A/C, Bi-Level Mode, and Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate
control settings, see Ú page 57.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration
of remote start until the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. The climate control settings
will change if manually adjusted by the driver
while the vehicle is in remote start mode, and
exit automatic override. This includes the OFF
button on the climate controls, which will turn
the system off.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER
D
E–ICER ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When remote start is active and the outside
ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C),
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will be enabled.
Exiting remote start will resume previous
operation, except if the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer is active. The Windshield Wiper De-Icer
timer and operation will continue.
REMOTE START CANCEL MESSAGE —
I
F EQUIPPED
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to
remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Cancelled — Liftgate Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Timer Expired
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To
Reset
The instrument cluster display message stays active
until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
2
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the
vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the
Keyless Enter ‘n Go ignition for unauthorized
operation. While the Vehicle Security system is
armed, interior switches for door locks and
liftgate release are disabled. If something
triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security system
will provide the following audible and visible
signals:
The horn will pulse
The park lamps and/or turn signals will flash
The vehicle security light in the instrument
cluster will flash
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security
system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed
in the OFF position.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry,
make sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition
system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to
lock the vehicle:
Push lock on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger
door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior
Passive Entry door handle with a valid key
fob available in the same exterior zone
Ú page 24.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed
using any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry unlock door handle
(if equipped) Ú page 24.
Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the
OFF position.
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or
disarm the Vehicle Security system. Use of
the door key cylinder when the alarm is
armed will sound the alarm when the door is
opened.
The Vehicle Security system remains armed
when the power liftgate is opened using the
liftgate button on the key fob. If someone
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and
opens any door from the inside, the alarm will
sound.
If Passive Entry (if equipped) is used to
unlock the liftgate, the Vehicle Security
system is disarmed and the rest of the
vehicle doors will remain locked unless
“Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is selected in the
Passive Entry settings.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed,
the interior power door lock switches will not
unlock the doors.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
(Continued)
The Vehicle Security system is designed to
protect your vehicle. However, you can create
conditions where the system will give you a false
alarm. If one of the previously described arming
sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security
system will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle
Security system will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will
flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is
taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system
will turn the horn off after 29 seconds, five
seconds between cycles, up to eight cycles if
the trigger remains active and the Vehicle
Security system will rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you
lock the doors using the manual door lock.
TAMPER ALERT
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security
system in your absence, the horn will sound
three times and the exterior lights will blink
three times when you disarm the Vehicle
Security system.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
The power door locks can be manually locked
from inside the vehicle by using the door lock
knob. To lock each door, push the door lock
knob on each door trim panel downward. To
unlock the front doors, pull the inside door
handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim
panel upward. If the lock knob is down when
the door is closed, the door will lock. Make
sure the key is not inside the vehicle before
closing the door.
Manual Door Lock Knob
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the
event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors
as you drive as well as when you park and
leave the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
2
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The power door lock switches are located on
each front door panel. Push the switch to lock or
unlock the doors and liftgate.
Power Door Lock Switches
If the lock knob is down when the door is closed,
the door will lock. Make sure the key fob is not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
NOTE:
If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device, the wireless
signal may get blocked, and the driver’s door
may not unlock automatically.
If the door lock switch is pushed while the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and
the driver's door is open, the doors will not lock.
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened
from inside the vehicle without first unlocking
the door. The door may be unlocked manually
by raising the lock knob.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO — PASSIVE
E
NTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system and a feature of Keyless Enter ‘n Go —
Passive Entry. This feature allows you to lock
and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having
to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off
within Uconnect Settings Ú page 172.
The key fob may not be able to be detected by
the vehicle Passive Entry system if it is
located next to a mobile phone, laptop or
other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob's wireless signal and
prevent the passive entry handle from
locking/unlocking the vehicle.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the keyless ignition node is in the OFF
mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle
and lock the vehicle. Unsupervised use of
the vehicle equipment may cause severe
person injuries and death.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated
approach (low beams, license plate lamp,
position lamps) for whichever time duration
is set between 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds.
Passive Entry Unlock also initiates two
flashes of the turn signal lamps.
If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/
snowing on the Passive Entry door handle,
the unlock sensitivity can be affected,
resulting in a slower response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry
and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and will arm the Vehicle
Security system (if equipped).
To Unlock From The Driver or Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the door handle, grab the handle to
unlock the vehicle. Grabbing the driver’s door
handle will unlock the driver door automatically.
Grabbing the passenger door handle will unlock
all doors and the liftgate automatically. The
interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed,
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the
driver’s front door handle. You can select
between “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and
“Unlock All Doors 1st Press” within Uconnect
Settings Ú page 172.
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry
Key Fob In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your
vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped
with an automatic door unlock feature, which
will function if the ignition is in the OFF position.
If one of the vehicle doors is open, and the door
panel switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all
open doors have been closed, the vehicle
checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for
any valid Passive Entry key fob. If one of the
vehicle's Passive Entry key fobs is detected
inside the vehicle, and no other valid Passive
Entry key fobs are detected outside the vehicle,
the Passive Entry system automatically unlocks
all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
(on the third attempt, ALL doors will lock, and
the Passive Entry key fob can be locked in the
vehicle).
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built
into the electronic liftgate handle. With a valid
Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, pull the electronic liftgate handle for a
power open on vehicles equipped with a power
liftgate. Pull the electronic liftgate handle and
lift for manual liftgate vehicles.
2
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
If the vehicle is unlocked, the liftgate will
open with the handle and no key fob is
required.
If the vehicle is locked, and the liftgate is
unlocked by using Passive Entry, the vehicle
doors will remain locked (unless “Unlock All
Doors 1st Press” is selected in the Passive
Entry settings).
The liftgate (and vehicle doors if unlocked)
must be locked using the lock button on the
key fob, the Passive Entry lock button, or the
lock buttons on the interior front door panels.
Electronic Liftgate Handle
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry
lock button located to the right of electronic
liftgate handle.
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in
Uconnect Settings, all doors will unlock when
you push the button on the liftgate. If "Unlock
Driver Door 1st Press" is programmed in
Uconnect Settings, the liftgate will unlock when
you push the button on the liftgate.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger
front door handle, push the door handle lock
button to lock all four doors and liftgate.
NOTE:
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when
the doors are locked with the door handle lock
button. This feature can be turned on or off
within Uconnect Settings Ú page 172.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
NOTE:
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the
door handle button. This could unlock the
door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
1 — Electronic Release Switch
2 — Lock Button Location
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or
unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry
door handle or door handle button. This is
done to allow you to check if the vehicle is
locked by pulling the door handle without the
vehicle unlocking.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if
the key fob battery is depleted.
Closeness proximity to mobile devices can
have an effect on the Passive Entry system.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using
the key fob lock button or the lock button
located on the vehicle’s interior door panel
Ú page 346.
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK ON EXIT FEATURE
— I
F EQUIPPED
If Auto Unlock is enabled within Uconnect
Settings Ú page 172, this feature will unlock all
the doors when any door is opened if the vehicle
is in PARK.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When enabled, the door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle’s speed
exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). Auto door lock
feature is enabled/disabled within Uconnect
Settings Ú page 172.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
S
YSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small
children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors
are equipped with Child-Protection Door Lock
system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child Protection
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the
lock and rotate to the lock or unlock
position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear
door.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
NOTE:
For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock knob up (unlocked position), roll
down the window, and open the door with the
outside door handle.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a
collision. Remember that the rear doors can
only be opened from the outside with the
Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
2
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
STEERING WHEEL
MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
C
OLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to
lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/
telescoping lever is located below the steering
wheel at the end of the steering column.
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Handle
To unlock the steering column, push the lever
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering
column, move the steering wheel upward or
downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock
the steering column in position, push the lever
upward until fully engaged.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
C
OLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. It also allows you
to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The
power tilt/telescoping steering column control
is located below the multifunction lever on the
steering column.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control Location
Use the four-way control to adjust the steering
column.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
(Continued)
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Settings Ú page 29, you can use your key fob or
the memory switch on the driver's door trim
panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering
column to saved positions.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
I
F EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel has only one
temperature setting. Once the heated steering
wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until
the operator turns it off. The heated steering
wheel may not turn on when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is
located on the center stack below the radio
screen, or within the Uconnect system.
Push the heated steering wheel button
once to turn the heating element on.
Push the heated steering wheel button a
second time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 21.
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to save up to two
different memory profiles for easy recall
through a memory switch. Each memory profile
saves desired position settings for the following
features:
Driver seat
Easy Entry/Exit seat operation (on/off)
(if equipped)
Side mirrors
Power tilt and telescopic steering column
(if equipped)
A set of desired radio station presets
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other phys-
ical conditions must exercise care when
using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or steering wheel covers of any type
and material. This may cause the steering
wheel heater to overheat.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs,
each can be linked to either memory position
1 or 2.
Be sure to program the radio presets prior to
programming the memory settings.
The memory setting switch is located on the
driver’s door trim panel. The switch consists of
three buttons:
The set (S) button, which is used to activate
the memory save function.
The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to
recall either of two saved memory profiles.
Memory Setting Buttons
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase the
selected profile from memory.
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN
position (do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt
and telescopic steering column [if
equipped], and radio station presets).
3. Push the set (S) button on the memory
switch, and then push the desired memory
button (1 or 2) within five seconds. The
instrument cluster display will display which
memory position has been set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle
in PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to
recall a memory profile.
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE REMOTE
K
EYLESS ENTRY KEY FOB TO MEMORY
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one
of two saved memory profiles by pushing the
unlock button on the key fob.
note:
Before programming your key fobs you must
select the “Memory Linked To Fob” feature
through the Uconnect Settings Ú page 172.
To program your key fobs, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position.
2. Select a desired memory profile, 1 or 2.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push
and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch. Then, within five seconds,
push and release button (1) or (2)
accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2)
will display in the instrument cluster display.
4. Push and release the lock button on the key
fob within 10 seconds.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
(Continued)
NOTE:
Your key fobs can be unlinked to your memory
settings by pushing the set (S) button, and
within 10 seconds, followed by pushing the
unlock button on the key fob.
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE:
If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in
PARK, a message will be displayed in the instru-
ment cluster display.
To recall the memory settings for driver one or
two, push the desired memory button (1 or 2) or
the unlock button on the key fob linked to the
desired memory position.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the
memory buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2), or by
pushing any of the seat adjustment switches.
When a recall is canceled, the driver's seat and
telescopic steering column (if equipped) will
stop moving. A delay of one second will occur
before another recall can be selected.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
System of the vehicle.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS)
— I
F EQUIPPED
Manual Front Passenger Seat Forward/
Rearward Adjustment
Some models may be equipped with a manual
front passenger seat. The passenger seat can
be adjusted forward or rearward by using a bar
located by the front of the seat cushion, near
the floor.
Adjustment Bar
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous. The sudden movement of the
seat could cause you to lose control. The
seat belt might not be adjusted properly
and you could be injured. Adjust the seat
only while the vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt and be seriously or
even fatally injured. Use the recliner only
when the vehicle is parked.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar
located under the seat cushion and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once
you have reached the desired position. Then,
using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat
adjusters have latched.
Manual Front Passenger Seatback
Adjustment — Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on
the outboard side of the seat, lean back to the
desired position and release the lever. To return
the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and
release the lever.
Recline Lever
Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature —
If Equipped
To fold the seatback to the flat load-floor
position, lift the recline lever and push the
seatback forward. To return to the seating
position, raise the seatback and lock it into
place.
Fold-Flat Passenger Seat
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous. The sudden movement of the
seat could cause you to lose control. The
seat belt might not be properly adjusted,
and you could be severely injured or killed.
Only adjust a seat while the vehicle is
parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the seat belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision, you could
slide under the seat belt and be severely
injured or killed. Use the recliner only when
the vehicle is parked.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)
60/40 Split Rear Seat
Second Row Fold Flat Seat
The second row seats can be folded flat to carry
cargo.
Pull upward on the release lever located on the
outboard side of the seat.
Release Lever
Fold-Flat Second Row Seat
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats
are left folded for an extended period of time.
This is normal and by simply opening the seats
to the open position, over time the seat cushion
will return to its normal shape.
Easy Access For Third Row
Either side of the rear seat can be tumbled
forward to allow passengers to easily access the
third row seats.
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release
the seat.
Release Lever
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat
or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat's path.
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
top of the seatback. This could impair
visibility or become a dangerous projectile in
a sudden stop or collision.
2
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Tumble the seat forward using the pull strap
located behind the seatback.
Tumble Pull Strap
Tumbled Second Row
To Raise Rear Seat
Fold the seat rearward to its original position,
and lock it into place.
Rear Captain’s Chairs — If Equipped
Second Row Captain’s Chairs Fold Flat Seats
The second row seats can be folded flat to carry
cargo.
Pull upward on the release lever located on the
outboard side of the seat.
Release Lever
Fold-Flat Second Row Seats
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the second row
seats in the tumbled position. The second
row seats are only intended to be tumbled for
entry and exit to the third row seat. Failure to
follow these instructions could result in
personal injury.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position the seat will not
provide the proper stability for child seats
and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats
are left folded for an extended period of time.
This is normal and by simply opening the seats
to the open position, over time the seat cushion
will return to its normal shape.
Easy Access For Third Row
Either side of the rear seat can be tumbled
forward to allow passengers to easily access the
third row seats.
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release
the seat.
Release Lever
2. Tumble the seat forward using the pull strap
located behind the seatback.
Tumble Strap
3. If your vehicle is equipped with a mini
console, there is a stepping pad to allow
passengers to easily access the third row
seats.
Mini Console Stepping Pad
To Raise Rear Seat
Fold the seat rearward to its original position,
and lock it into place.
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the second row
seats in the tumbled position. The second
row seats are only intended to be tumbled for
entry and exit to the third row seat. Failure to
follow these instructions could result in
personal injury.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position the seat will not
provide the proper stability for child seats
and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
2
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Folding Third Row
Both third row seats can be folded forward to
increase the cargo area. To lower either seat,
pull on the release handle located on the back
of the seat and lower the seat using the pull
strap located next to the release handle.
Release Handles
Third Row Folded
NOTE:
The second row seats must be in their full
upright position, folded flat or tumbled when
folding the third row seats.
To raise the seat, pull the seat toward you using
the strap located on the back of the seat.
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats
are left folded for an extended period of time.
This is normal and by simply opening the seats
to the open position, over time the seat cushion
will return to its normal shape.
POWER ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with eight-way
power driver and front passenger seats. The
power seat switches are located on the
outboard side of the seat. There are two
switches that control the movement of the seat
cushion and the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position the seat will not
provide the proper stability for child seats
and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
1 — Seatback Switch
2 — Seat Switch
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward by using the seat switch. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been
reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the
rear of seat switch, the seat will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted
in two directions. Pull upward or push
downward on the front of the seat switch, the
front of the seat cushion will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted
forward or rearward. Push the seatback switch
forward or rearward, the seat will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position is reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or
passenger seats may also be equipped with
power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is
located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar
support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
the lumbar support. Pushing upward or
downward on the switch will raise and lower the
position of the support.
Power Lumbar Switch
Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat
positioning to enhance driver mobility when
entering and exiting the vehicle.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt, which could result
in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat
or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat's path.
2
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The distance the driver seat moves depends on
where you have the driver seat positioned when
you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position.
When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the
OFF position, the driver seat will move about
2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver
seat position is greater than or equal to
2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when you place the vehicle’s ignition
in the ACC or RUN position.
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not available
when the driver seat position is less than 0.9
of an inch (22.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. At this position, there is no benefit to
the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or
Easy Entry.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry
and Easy Exit positions are stored in each Driver
Memory Setting profile Ú page 29.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or
disabled) through the programmable features
in the Uconnect system Ú page 172.
POWER PASSENGER SEAT ADJUSTMENT
— I
F EQUIPPED
Some models are equipped with a six-way
power passenger seat. The power seat switch is
located on the outboard side of the seat. The
switch is used to control the movement of the
seat and seat cushion.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward by using the seat switch. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been
reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the
rear of seat switch, the seat will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted
in two directions. Pull upward or push
downward on the front of the seat switch, the
front of the seat cushion will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted
forward or rearward. Push the seatback switch
forward or rearward, the seat will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt, which could result
in serious injury or death.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are
located on the center stack below the radio
screen, or within the Uconnect system.
Push the heated seat switch once to turn
the HI setting on.
Push the heated seat switch a second
time to turn the MED setting on.
Push the heated seat switch a third time
to turn the LO setting on.
Push the heated seat switch a fourth time
to turn the heating elements off.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be
felt within two to five minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
The level of heat selected will stay on until
the operator changes it.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 21.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
The two second row outboard seats may be
equipped with heated seats. There are two
heated seat switches that allow the rear
passengers to operate the seats independently.
The heated seat switches for each heater are
located on the rear of the center console.
You can choose from HI, LO, or off heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate
the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will
illuminate for HI, one for LO and none for off.
Push the switch once to turn the HI setting
on.
Push the switch a second time to turn the
LO setting on.
Push the switch a third time to turn the
heating elements off.
The level of heat selected will stay on until the
operator changes it.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat
or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat's path.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-
ical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
2
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
FRONT VENTILATED SEATS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The ventilated seats control buttons are located
on the center stack below the radio screen, or
within the Uconnect system. The fans operate at
three speeds: HI, MED, and LO.
Press the ventilated seat switch once to
choose HI.
Press the ventilated seat switch a second
time to choose MED.
Press the ventilated seat switch a third
time to choose LO.
Press the ventilated seat switch a fourth
time to turn the ventilation off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 21.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk
of injury by restricting head movement in the
event of a rear impact. Head restraints should
be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint
is located above the top of your ear.
Front Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with front four-way
driver and passenger head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button, located at the
base of the head restraint, and push downward
on the head restraint.
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only.
If either of the head restraints require removal,
see an authorized dealer.
Head Restraint Adjustment Button Location
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
(Continued)
To adjust the head restraint forward, pull the
top of the head restraint toward the front of the
vehicle as desired and release. To adjust the
head restraint rearward, pull the top of the head
restraint to the forward most position and
release. The head restraint will return to the
rear most position.
Forward Adjustment
Head Restraints — Rear Seats
The head restraints on the outboard seats are
not adjustable. They automatically fold forward
when the rear seat is folded to a load floor
position, but do not return to their normal
position when the rear seat is raised. After
returning either seat to its upright position,
raise the head restraint until it locks in place.
The outboard head restraints are not
removable.
The center head restraint has limited
adjustment. Lift upward on the head restraint to
raise it or push downward on the head restraint
to lower it.
Rear Head Restraint
NOTE:
For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, see
Ú page 216.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury
or death in a collision. Always make sure the
outboard head restraints are in their upright
positions when the seat is to be occupied.
2
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Head Restraint Removal — Rear Seats
The center head restraint can be adjusted when
occupied, or removed for Child Seat Tethering.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go by pulling upward. Then, push the
release button at the base of the post while
pulling the head restraint upward. To reinstall
the head restraint, put the head restraint posts
into the holes and push downward. Then, adjust
the head restraint to the appropriate height.
Center Head Restraint Release Button
NOTE:
For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, see
Ú page 216.
Power Folding Third Row Head Restraints
For improved visibility when in REVERSE, the
third row head restraints can be folded using
the Uconnect system.
Press the “Controls” button located on the
bottom of the Uconnect display.
Press the Headrest Fold button to power fold
the third row head restraints.
NOTE:
The head restraints can only be folded down-
ward using the Headrest Fold button. The
head restraints must be raised manually
when occupying the third row.
Do not fold if there are passengers seated in
the third row seats.
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious
injury or death in a collision. Always make
sure the outboard head restraints are in
their upright positions when the seat is to
be occupied.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occu-
pant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
INTRODUCING UCONNECT
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR)
with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know to
control your Uconnect system.
Uconnect 4 With 8.4-inch Display
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The basic Voice Commands below can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button or say the vehicle’s wakeup
word, “Hey Uconnect”. After the beep, say:
“Cancel” to stop a current voice session
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands
“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts
again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
voice recognition system’s status. Cues appear
on the touchscreen.
GET STARTED
All you need to control your Uconnect system
with your voice are the buttons on your steering
wheel.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Reduce background noise. Wind and
passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead.
Each time you give a Voice Command, first
push the VR button, wait until after the beep,
then say your Voice Command. For the
Uconnect 5 with 10.1-inch Display, you can
also say the vehicle “wakeup” word and state
your command. Some examples of “wake up”
words include “Hey Uconnect” or “Hey
Dodge”.
A passenger can press the VR button
shortcut on the radio status bar to also issue
a command.
You can interrupt the help message or
system prompts by pushing the VR button
and saying a Voice Command from the
current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call And
Send Or Receive A Text
2 — Push The Voice Recognition Button To Begin
Radio, Media, Navigation And Climate Functions
2
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2020 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar
and Uconnect are registered trademarks and
Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US
LLC. Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
Ú page 346.
Uconnect System Support:
US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or
call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days
a week)
Canadian residents visit www.DriveUcon-
nect.ca or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
SiriusXM Guardian™ services support:
US residents visit www.driveuconnect.com/
sirius-xm-guardian or call: 1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visit www.siriusxm.ca/
guardian-v1/ or call: 1-877-324-9091
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
reduced by moving the small control under the
mirror to the night position (toward the rear of
the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward the
windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is
disabled when the vehicle is in REVERSE to
improve rear view viewing.
You can turn the feature on or off by pushing the
button at the base of the mirror. A light in the
button will illuminate to indicate when the
dimming feature is activated.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down
one of the visors and lift the cover.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If
Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for
additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor
to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the corner clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
4. Extend the sun visor blade for additional
sun blockage.
NOTE:
The sun visor blade can also be extended while
the sun visor is against the windshield for addi-
tional sun blockage through the front of the
vehicle.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the
center of the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve
the optimal view.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be
moved either forward or rearward to resist
damage. The hinges have three detent
positions:
Full forward position
Full rearward position
Normal position
OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC DIMMING
M
IRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The outside mirrors will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is
controlled by the inside automatic dimming
mirror. The mirrors will automatically adjust for
headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
POWER MIRRORS
The power mirror switch is located on the
driver's side door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror
select buttons and a four-way mirror control
switch. To adjust a mirror, push the mirror select
button for the mirror that you want to adjust.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside
convex mirror will look smaller and farther
away than they really are. Relying too much on
side convex mirrors could cause you to collide
with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance
of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
2
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of
the four arrows for the direction that you want
the mirror to move.
Power Mirror Switch
Power mirror preselected positions can be
controlled by the Driver Memory Settings
Ú page 29 (if equipped).
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost
or ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped) Ú page 57.
TILT SIDE MIRRORS IN REVERSE — IF
E
QUIPPED
This feature provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will assist the driver’s ground
visibility. Outside mirrors will move slightly
downward from the present position when the
vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors
will then return to the original position when the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE position. If the
vehicle is equipped with Driver Memory
Settings, this feature will be linked to the
programmable settings.
NOTE:
The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 172.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®)
HomeLink® Buttons And Indicator Light
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held
transmitters that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motorized gates,
lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your
vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in
the overhead console or sunvisor designate
the three different HomeLink® channels.
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Right Mirror Selection
3 — Left Mirror Selection
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
To operate HomeLink®, push and release
any of the programmed HomeLink® buttons.
These buttons will activate the devices they
are programmed to with each press of the
corresponding HomeLink® button.
The HomeLink® indicator light is located
above the center button Ú page 346.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the Radio Frequency (RF)
signal, it is recommended that a new battery be
placed in the hand-held transmitter of the
device that is being programmed to the
HomeLink® system. Make sure your hand-held
transmitter is programmed to activate the
device you are trying to program your
HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the
garage before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the
channels of your HomeLink® before you use it
for the first time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
C
HANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or
until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed
when programming HomeLink® for the first
time. Do not erase channels when programming
additional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
R
OLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE
D
EVICE
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine
whether the device has a rolling code or
non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a
good indicator is its manufacturing date.
Typically, devices manufactured after 1995
have rolling codes. A device with a rolling code
will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button
located where the antenna is attached to the
device. The button may not be immediately
visible when looking at the device. The name
and color of the button may vary slightly by
manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button
you normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will
not have a rolling code. These devices will also
not have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
G
ARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to
activate your garage door opener motor, follow
the steps below:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using
this procedure. You do not need to erase all chan-
nels when programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1
to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program,
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you push and hold
the garage door opener transmitter button
you are trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
the HomeLink® indicator light. The
HomeLink® indicator light will flash slowly
and then rapidly. Once this happens,
release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is
plugged in before moving on to the rolling code/
non-rolling code final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling
code final step 2, after completing rolling code
final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the
garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button. This can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the
garage door opener motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the
programmed HomeLink® button three
times (holding the button for two seconds
each time). If the garage door opener motor
operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button
to confirm that the garage door opener
motor operates. If the garage door opener
motor does not operate, repeat the final
steps for the rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final
Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. If the
HomeLink® indicator light stays on
constantly, programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button
to confirm that the garage door opener
motor operates. If the garage door opener
motor does not operate, repeat the steps
from the beginning.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program the
transceiver if people or pets are in the path
of the door or gate.
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage
or confined area while programming the
transceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous when inhaled and can cause you
and others to be severely injured or killed.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
M
ISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
Refer to “Programming HomeLink® To A
Garage Door Opener” for the procedure on how
to program HomeLink® to a miscellaneous
device, as it follows the same procedure. Be
sure to determine if the device has a rolling
code, or non-rolling code before beginning the
programming process.
NOTE:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission, which may not
be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the
signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to time-out in the same manner. The
procedure may need to be performed multiple
times to successfully pair the device to your
HomeLink® buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
H
OMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that
has been previously trained, without erasing all
the channels, follow the procedure below. Be
sure to determine whether the new device you
want to program the HomeLink® button to has
a rolling code, or non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition to the ON/RUN position,
without starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the HomeLink® Indicator light
begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A
Garage Door Opener” and follow all
remaining steps.
CANADIAN /GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/
United States that require the transmitter
signals to “time-out” after several seconds of
transmission:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission, which may not
be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the
signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
cycling process to prevent possible overheating
of the garage door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the
engine on. Make sure while programming
HomeLink® with the engine on that your vehicle
is outside of your garage, or that the garage
door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink®
button while you push and release (“cycle”)
your hand-held transmitter every two
seconds until HomeLink® has successfully
accepted the frequency signal. The
indicator light will flash slowly and then
rapidly when fully trained.
2
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to
change flash rates. When it changes, it is
programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds
or longer in rare cases. The garage door
may open and close while you are
programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the
indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the Home-
Link® button is pushed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/
device for programming, plug it back in at this
time.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever is located on the left
side of the steering column.
Multifunction Lever
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side
of the instrument panel, next to the steering
wheel. The headlight switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights,
instrument panel lights, cargo lights and fog
lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is
on, the parking lights, taillights, license plate
light and instrument panel lights are also turned
on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the
headlight switch back to the O (off) position.
1 — Rotate Headlight Switch
2 — Dimmer Control
3 — Fog Light Switch
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic head-
light and fog light (if equipped) lenses that
are lighter and less susceptible to stone
breakage than glass lights. Plastic is not as
scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be
followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid
wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt,
wash with a mild soap solution followed by
rinsing.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS)
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) come on
whenever the engine is running. The lights will
remain on until the ignition is placed in the OFF
position, or the parking brake is engaged. The
headlight switch must be used during normal
night time driving.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime
Running Lights will automatically deactivate
when the front fog lights are turned on.
If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased, the Daytime Running
Lights can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect system Ú page 172.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running
Lights may deactivate or reduce intensity on
one side of the vehicle (when a turn signal is
activated on that side), or on both sides of
the vehicle (when the hazard warning lights
are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the
instrument panel to switch the headlights to
high beams. Pulling the multifunction back will
turn the low beams on.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
system provides increased forward lighting at
night by automatically controlling the high
beams through the use of a camera mounted
on the inside rearview mirror. This camera
detects vehicle specific light and automatically
switches from high beams to low beams until
the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
can be turned on or off by selecting or dese-
lecting “Auto High Beam” within your Uconnect
Settings
Ú
page 172, as well as turning the
headlight switch to the AUTO position.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to
the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstruc-
tions on the windshield or camera lens will
cause the system to function improperly.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam
Headlamp Control mirror is replaced, the
mirror must be re-aimed to ensure proper
performance. See a local authorized dealer.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your
headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction
lever toward you. This will cause the high beam
headlights to turn on, and remain on, until the
lever is released.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other abrasive
materials to clean the lenses.
2
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS
This system automatically turns the headlights
on or off according to ambient light levels. To
turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch
counterclockwise to the AUTO position. When
the system is on, the headlight time delay
feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place
the ignition into the OFF position. The headlight
time delay can be programmed 0/30/60/90
seconds within Uconnect Settings Ú page 172.
To turn the automatic system off, move the
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
PARKING LIGHTS AND PANEL LIGHTS
To turn on the parking lights and instrument
panel lights, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise. To turn off the parking lights, rotate
the headlight switch back to the O (off) position.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS WITH WIPERS
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic
Headlights, it also has this
customer-programmable feature. When your
headlights are in the automatic mode and the
engine is running, they will automatically turn
on when the wiper system is on. This feature is
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 172.
NOTE:
When your headlights come on during the
daytime, the vehicle will monitor outside bright-
ness and decide if the instrument panel needs
to be dimmed or not Ú page 54.
HEADLIGHT DELAY
To assist when exiting the vehicle, the headlight
delay feature will leave the headlights on for up
to 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the
ignition is placed in the OFF position while the
headlight switch is on, and then the headlight
switch is cycled off. Headlight delay can be
canceled by either turning the headlight switch
on then off, or by placing the ignition in the ON
position.
NOTE:
The headlight delay time is programmable
through the Uconnect system Ú page 172.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights
are left on after the ignition is placed in the OFF
position, the vehicle will chime when the
driver’s door is opened.
FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The fog lights are turned on by pushing fog light
button on the headlight switch.
Fog Light Operation
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
The fog lights will operate only when the parking
lights are on or when the vehicle headlights are
on low beam. An indicator light located in the
instrument cluster display will illuminate when
the fog lights are on. The fog lights will turn off
when the switch is pushed a second time, when
the headlight switch is rotated to the off
position, or the high beam is selected.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to
activate the turn signals. The arrows on each
side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defec-
tive outside light bulb.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal will flash three times then automatically
turn off.
BATTERY SAVER
Timers are set to both the interior and exterior
lights to protect the life of your vehicle’s battery.
After 10 minutes, if the ignition is OFF and any
door is left open or the dimmer control is rotated
all the way up to the dome light on position, the
interior lights will automatically turn off.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is
ON.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, the exterior lights will
automatically turn off after eight minutes. If the
headlights are turned on and left on for eight
minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
COURTESY LIGHTS
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing
the top corner of the lens. To turn the lights off,
push the lens a second time.
Courtesy Lights
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
Lights are mounted in the overhead console.
Each light can be turned on by pushing the
switch on either side of the console. These
buttons are backlit for night time visibility.
Front Map/Reading Lights
2
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the lights off, push the switch a second
time. The lights also turn on when a door is
opened. The lights will also turn on when the
unlock button on the key fob is pushed.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Ambient Light — If Equipped
The overhead console is equipped with an
ambient light feature. This light illuminates for
improved visibility of the floor and center
console area.
Ambient Light
Dimmer Control
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when
the front doors are opened or when the dimmer
control (rotating wheel on the right side of the
headlight switch) is rotated to its farthest
upward position. If your vehicle is equipped with
a key fob and the unlock button is pushed, the
courtesy and dome lights will turn on. When a
door is open and the interior lights are on,
rotating the dimmer control all the way down, to
the (O) off detent, will cause all the interior
lights to go out. This is also known as the “Party”
mode because it allows the doors to stay open
for extended periods of time without
discharging the vehicle’s battery.
Dimmer Control
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting
can be regulated by rotating the dimmer control
up (brighter) or down (dimmer). When the
headlights are on you can supplement the
brightness of the odometer, trip odometer,
radio and overhead console by rotating the
control to its farthest position up until you hear
a click. This feature is called the “Parade” mode
and is useful when headlights are required
during the day.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are
located on the multifunction lever on the left
side of the steering column. The front wipers are
operated by rotating a switch, located on the
end of the lever.
Multifunction Lever
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first
four detent positions for intermittent settings,
the fifth detent for low wiper operation and the
sixth detent for high wiper operation.
Intermittent Wipers
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings
when weather conditions make a single wiping
cycle, with a variable delay between cycles,
desirable. At driving speeds above 10 mph
(16 km/h), the delay can be regulated from a
maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every
one second (fourth detent). If the vehicle is
moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay
times will be doubled.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push on the end of the lever
(toward the steering wheel) and hold. If the
lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting,
the wipers will turn on and operate for several
cycles after the end of the lever is released, and
then resume the intermittent interval previously
selected.
Windshield Washer Operation
If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers
are in the off position, the wipers will operate for
several cycles, then turn off.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the “park” position. If the
windshield wiper switch is turned off, and the
blades cannot return to the “park” position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
2
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the washer will stop if
the switch is held for more than 20 seconds.
Once the switch is released the washer will
resume normal operation.
Mist
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the
MIST position and release for a single wiping
cycle.
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed
on the windshield. The wash function must be
used in order to spray the windshield with
washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement,
see Ú page 292.
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the
windshield and automatically activates the
wipers. Rotate the end of the multifunction
lever to one of four detent positions to activate
this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted
with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay
position one is the least sensitive, and wiper
delay position four is the most sensitive.
Setting three is preferred by the average driver
during normal rain conditions.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate
when the wiper switch is in the low or
high-speed position.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function
properly when ice, or dried salt water is
present on the windshield.
Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or
silicone may reduce Rain Sensing perfor-
mance.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 172.
The Rain Sensing system has protection
features for the wiper blades and arms, and will
not operate under the following conditions:
Low Ambient Temperature — When the igni-
tion is first placed in the ON position, the Rain
Sensing system will not operate until the
wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is
greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the outside
temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When
the ignition is in the ON position, and the gear
selector is in NEUTRAL, the Rain Sensing
system will not operate until the wiper switch
is moved, vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear selector is
moved out of NEUTRAL.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the
windshield could lead to a collision. You might
not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To
avoid sudden icing of the windshield during
freezing weather, warm the windshield with
the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on
the multifunction lever on the left side of the
steering column. The rear wiper/washer is
operated by rotating a switch, located at the
middle of the lever.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
Rotate the center portion of the lever
upward to the first detent for
intermittent operation and to the
second detent for continuous rear
wiper operation.
Rotate the center portion of the lever
upward to the third detent to activate
the washer. The washer will continue to
operate as long as the switch is held.
Rotate the center portion downward from the
OFF position to activate the rear washer. The
washer will continue to operate as long as the
switch is held.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if
the switch is held for more than 20 seconds.
Once the switch is released the pump will
resume normal operation.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, the wiper will
automatically return to the “park” position.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to
regulate the temperature, air flow, and direction
of air circulating throughout the vehicle. The
controls are located on the touchscreen and on
the instrument panel below the radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1–inch Display
Temperature Controls
Uconnect 4 With 8.4–inch Display Temperature
Controls
2
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Max A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button
on the touchscreen to change the
current setting to the coldest output
of air. The MAX A/C indicator
illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
this function again will cause the MAX A/C
operation to switch into manual mode and the
MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position
can be adjusted to desired user settings.
Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C
to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the
touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen to change the current
setting. The A/C indicator illuminates
when A/C is on.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the
operator to manually activate or deactivate the
air conditioning system. When the air
conditioning system is turned on, cool
dehumidified air will flow through the outlets
into the cabin.
NOTE:
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side
glass, select Defrost mode and increase blower
speed if needed. If your air conditioning perfor-
mance seems lower than expected, check the
front of the A/C condenser (located in front of
the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
the front of the radiator and through the
condenser.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to
change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air
mode. The Recirculation indicator and
the A/C indicator illuminate when the
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation
can be used when outside conditions such as
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are
present. Recirculation can be used in all modes.
Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the
touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that
could create fogging on the inside of the
windshield. The A/C can be deselected
manually without disturbing the mode control
selection. Continuous use of Recirculation
mode may make the inside air stuffy and
window fogging may occur. Extended use of this
mode if not recommended.
AUTO Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on
the faceplate, to change the current
setting. The AUTO button
automatically controls the interior cabin
temperature by adjusting distribution and
amount of airflow. Performing this function will
cause the system to switch between manual
mode and automatic modes. AUTO mode is
highly recommended for efficiency Ú page 64.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the touchscreen
button, or push and release the
button on the faceplate, to change
the current airflow setting to Defrost
mode. The Front Defrost indicator illuminates
when the Front Defrost is on. Air comes from the
windshield and side window demist outlets.
When the defrost button is selected, the blower
level may increase. Use Defrost mode with
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
(Continued)
maximum temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting and
defogging. When toggling the Front Defrost
mode button, the climate system will return to
the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the button on the
touchscreen, or push and release the
button on the faceplate, to turn on the
rear window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost
indicator illuminates when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
Driver And Passenger Temperature
Buttons
These buttons provide the driver and passenger
with independent temperature control.
Push the Up button on the faceplate
or press and slide the temperature
bar towards the red arrow button on
the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings.
Push the Down button on the
faceplate or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue
arrow button on the touchscreen for
cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC
feature on/off. The SYNC indicator
illuminates when SYNC is on. SYNC is
used to synchronize the front passenger
temperature and rear passenger temperature,
mode, and blower settings with the driver
temperature, mode, and blower settings.
Changing the front passenger temperature or
rear passenger temperature, mode, and blower
settings while in SYNC will automatically exit
this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touch-
screen.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the
Climate Control system. There are
seven blower speeds available.
Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode
to switch to manual operation. The speeds can
be selected using either the blower control knob
on the faceplate or the buttons on the
touchscreen.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
CAUTION! (Continued)
2
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Faceplate: The blower speed increases as
you turn the blower control knob clockwise
from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the blower
control knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to
reduce the blower setting and the large
blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower speed can also be selected by
pressing the blower bar area between the
icons.
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the
Mode buttons on the touchscreen to
change the airflow distribution mode.
The airflow distribution mode can be
adjusted so air comes from the instrument
panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and
demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these
outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust
the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the
defrost and side window demister
outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A
slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor,
defrost, and side window demister
outlets. This setting works best in cold
or snowy conditions that require extra
heat to the windshield. This setting is good for
maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn
the Climate Control ON/OFF.
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls
From The Front ATC Panel
Front ATC Panel Uconnect 5/5 NAV With
10.1–inch Display Rear Controls
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
Front ATC Panel Uconnect 4 With 8.4–inch
Display Rear Controls
The Three-Zone ATC system allows for
adjustment of the rear climate controls from the
front ATC panel.
To change the rear system settings:
Press the "Rear Climate" button on the touch-
screen to display the rear climate controls. The
control functions now operate the rear system.
To return to the Front screen on the Uconnect
system, press the "Front Climate" button on
the touchscreen.
Rear Climate Control Button
Press and release this button to access
the rear climate controls. The Rear
Climate indicator will illuminate when
the rear climate controls are ON.
Rear Auto Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen to change the current
setting. The REAR AUTO indicator will
illuminate when REAR AUTO is on.
This feature automatically controls the rear
interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow
distribution and amount. Toggling this function
will cause the rear system to switch between
manual mode and automatic modes
Ú page 64.
Rear Lock Button
Press and release this button to lock
out the rear manual temperature
controls from adjusting the rear
temperature and blower settings. The
LOCK REAR indicator will illuminate when LOCK
REAR is on. Press and release this button again
to exit the feature.
Front Climate Button
Press and release to return to the
Front Climate Control Screen.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC
feature on/off. The SYNC indicator will
illuminate when SYNC is on. SYNC is
used to synchronize the front passenger
temperature and rear passenger temperature,
mode, and blower settings with the driver
temperature, mode, and blower settings.
Changing the front passenger temperature or
rear passenger temperature, mode, or blower
settings while in SYNC will automatically exit
this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touch-
screen.
Rear Blower Control
Rear Blower Control is used to
regulate the amount of air forced
through the rear climate system.
There are seven blower speeds
available. The speeds can be selected using the
buttons on the touchscreen. Use the small
blower icon (or blower icon with the downward
arrow) to reduce the blower setting, and the
2
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
large blower icon (or blower icon with the
upward arrow) to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the
blower bar area between the icons.
Rear Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the
Mode buttons on the touchscreen to
change the airflow distribution mode.
The rear airflow distribution mode can
be adjusted so air comes from the headliner
outlets, the floor outlets or both.
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
headliner. Each of these outlets can
be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the
outlets to one side shuts off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen
to change the air distribution mode to
Bi-Level Mode. In Bi-Level Mode, air
comes from both the headliner
outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the
headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor
outlets.
Floor Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen
to change the air distribution mode to
Floor Mode. In Floor Mode, air comes
from the floor outlets.
Rear Climate Control OFF Button
To manually set the rear blower
controls to off, press the Rear Climate
Control/Blower Off button.
Rear Automatic Temperature Control
The rear system temperature control buttons
are located on the headliner on the passenger
side of the vehicle.
Rear Automatic Climate Controls
The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the
rear right side of the third row seats and
overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating
position. The system provides heated air
through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified
air through the headliner outlets.
AUTO Button
Turn the blower knob to the AUTO
setting. This feature automatically
controls the rear interior cabin
temperature by adjusting airflow
distribution and amount. Changing the blower
knob to any other blower setting will cause the
rear system to switch to manual mode
Ú page 64.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Rear Temperature Control
Turn the rear temperature knob to adjust the
temperature.
Turn the knob to the right (clockwise)
to raise the temperature.
Turn the knob to the left
(counterclockwise) to lower the
temperature.
The rear temperature setting is displayed in the
control head.
Rear Blower Control
Turn the rear blower knob to regulate
the amount of air forced through the
system in any mode you select. The
blower speed increases as you move
the knob clockwise from the off position. The
rear blower setting is displayed in the control
head.
Rear Mode Control
Turn the rear mode knob to adjust
airflow distribution. The rear mode
settings are displayed in the control
head. The rear airflow distribution
mode can be adjusted so air comes from the
headliner outlets, the floor outlets, or both.
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
headliner. Each of these outlets can
be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the
outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner
outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the
headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor
outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Rear Temperature Lock
The Rear Temperature Lock symbol
on the control head is illuminated
when the rear controls are locked by
the front system.
Rear Lock
Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock button on
the Uconnect touchscreen, illuminates a lock
symbol in the rear display. The rear temperature
and air source are controlled from the front
Uconnect system.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the
rear ATC control when the Rear Temperature
Lock button is turned off.
The rear ATC is located in the headliner, near
the center of the vehicle.
Press the Rear Temperature Lock button on
the Uconnect touchscreen. This turns off the
Rear Temperature Lock icon in the rear
temperature knob.
Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature
and the Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your
comfort needs.
ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower
knob counterclockwise to AUTO.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the
ATC System will automatically achieve and
maintain that comfort level. When the system is
set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary
to change the settings. You will experience the
greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
2
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the front
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Panel and the word “AUTO” will illuminate
in the front ATC display, along with two
temperatures for the driver and front
passenger. The system will then automat-
ically regulate the amount of airflow.
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain, by adjusting the driver,
passenger, and rear temperatures. Once
the desired temperature is displayed, the
system will achieve and automatically
maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings. The system automatically adjusts the
temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
automatic mode, during cold start-ups, the
blower fan will remain on low until the engine
warms up. The fan will engage immediately if
the Defrost mode is selected, or by changing the
front blower knob setting.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system
is being used in the manual mode.
NOTE:
The system will not automatically sense the
presence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield.
Defrost mode must be manually selected to
clear the windshield and side glass.
CLIMATE VOICE RECOGNITION
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and
keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
the beep, say one of the following commands:
“Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Did you know: Voice Command for Climate may
only be used to adjust the interior temperature
of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to
adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if
equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic
Temperature Control System through an
intake grille, located in the right side trim
panel behind the third row seats. The heater
outlets are located in the right side trim
panel, just behind the passenger second row
door. Do not block or place objects directly in
front of the inlet grille or heater outlets. The
electrical system could overload causing
damage to the blower motor.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A solution of 50%
OAT (Organic Additive Technology) coolant that
meets the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032 and 50% water is
recommended Ú page 340.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and
defroster performance, make sure the engine
cooling system is functioning properly and the
proper amount, type, and concentration of
coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation
mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate
Control system when the vehicle is being stored
for an extended period of time, see
Ú page 332.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly
removed by turning the mode selector to
Defrost. The Defrost/Floor mode can be used to
maintain a clear windshield and provide
sufficient heating. If side window fogging
becomes objectionable, increase blower speed
to improve airflow and clearing of the side
windows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the
inside in mild but rainy or humid weather.
NOTE:
Recirculate without A/C should not be used
for long periods, as fogging may occur.
Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will
automatically adjust the climate control
settings to reduce or eliminate window
fogging on the front windshield. When this
occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstructions,
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air
intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the
air distribution box, they could plug the water
drains. In Winter months, make sure the air
intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized
dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to
have it replaced when needed Ú page 286.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control
system may automatically adjust airflow to
maintain cabin comfort. Customer settings will
be maintained upon return to an engine running
condition.
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped
The windshield wiper de-icer is a heating
element located at the base of the windshield.
It operates automatically once the following
conditions are met:
Activation By Front Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically
during a cold weather manual start with full
defrost, and when the ambient temperature
is below 33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Rear Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically
when the Rear Defrost is operating and the
ambient temperature is below 33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Remote Start Operation
When the Remote Start is activated and the
outside ambient temperature is less than
33°F (0.6°C) the windshield wiper de-icer is
2
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
activated. Upon exiting Remote Start, the
climate control functions will resume their
previous operation except, if the de-icer is
active, the de-icer timer and operation will
continue.
Operating Tips Chart
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
Glove Compartment
To open the glove compartment, pull the
release handle.
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is Very
Hot
Set the mode control
to (Panel Mode),
(A/C) on, and
blower on high. Roll
down the windows for
a minute to flush out
the hot air. Adjust the
controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C) on and
set the mode control
to the (Panel
Mode) position.
Cool Sunny
Operate in
(Bi-Level Mode)
position.
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control
to (Floor Mode)
and turn (A/C) on
to keep windows
clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control
to the (Floor
Mode) position. If
windshield fogging
starts to occur, move
the control to the
(Mix Mode) position.
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
Front Center Console
The front center console contains both an upper
and a lower storage area.
To open the upper storage compartment, pull
upward on the small latch located on the lid.
Storage Compartment Latches
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to
access the lower storage compartment.
Sunglasses Bin Door
At the front of the console a compartment is
provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a “push/
push” design. Push the push cover on the door
to open. Push the push cover on the door to
close.
Sunglasses Bin Door
Rear Full Center Console — If Equipped
The rear full center console contains both an
upper and a lower storage area.
Storage Compartment
To open the upper storage compartment, pull
upward on the small latch located on the front
of the lid.
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to
access the lower storage compartment.
Storage Compartment Latches
NOTE:
Lower storage compartment light is always on
with ignition in the ON/RUN position.
1 — Upper Storage Compartment Latch
2 — Lower Storage Compartment Latch
2
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The upper storage compartment may also be
lifted forward. Push in the release button
located on the back of the lid.
Storage Compartment Rear Push Button
When lifted forward there is access to the lower
storage compartment.
Lower Storage Compartment
NOTE:
When the lower storage compartment is
accessed, it allows the armrest to flip forward for
“fold flat mode”. Fold flat mode allows the
console armrest to be lowered below the fold flat
seat plane and protect the armrest vinyl from
damage when using the vehicle to haul cargo.
Fold Flat Mode
Open storage areas, or cubby bins with
removable liners, are located rearward of the
cupholders and in the lower front of the console.
Console Cubby Bins
Rear Mini Center Console — If Equipped
An open storage area, or cubby bin with removable
liner, is located in the front of the console.
Console Cubby Bin
CAUTION!
Remove any items stored in the console
cupholders or devices with cords routing
through upper storage area. Damage may
occur to upper console lid and device cables
when upper storage compartment is lifted
forward.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
USB/AUX C ONTROL
This feature allows an external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port
may activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
features, if equipped. For further information,
refer to “Android Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in
the Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Connecting The AUX Audio Input Or
External USB Device
Use the connection cable to connect an external
USB device to the vehicles USB/AUX connector
port which is located in the center console.
The USB ports on the media hub are equipped
with a Smart Electronic Voltage Regulator
(Smart Charge) feature. This feature allows a
device to charge for up to one hour after the
vehicle is powered off.
Integrated Center Console USB/AUX Media HUB
Once the audio device is connected and
synchronized to the vehicles USB control
system (an external USB device may take a few
minutes to connect), the audio device starts
charging and is ready for use.
NOTE:
If the audio device battery is completely
discharged, it may not communicate with the
USB control system until a minimum charge is
attained. Leaving the audio device connected to
the USB control system may charge it to the
required level.
Using This Feature
By using an external USB device to connect to
the USB port:
The audio device can be played on the
vehicle’s sound system, providing metadata
(artist, track title, album, etc.) information on
the radio display.
The audio device can be controlled using the
radio buttons to Play, Browse, and List the
contents.
The audio device battery charges when
plugged into the USB/AUX connector (if
supported by the specific audio device).
1 — Mini-USB Type C Port
2 — Standard USB Type A Port
3 — AUX Port
2
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
For further information, refer to the Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Second Row USB Charging Port
Second Row USB Charging ports can be used
for charging purposes only. Use the connection
cable to connect an external USB device to the
vehicle’s USB charging ports which are located
either on the rear of the front center console
and/or in the second row center console.
Rear Center Console USB Ports
Second Row Center Console USB Port
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp)
power outlets that can be used to power cellular
phones, small electronics and other low
powered electrical accessories. The power
outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is
powered. Power outlets labeled with a “key” are
powered when the ignition switch is in the ON or
ACC position, while the outlets labeled with a
“battery” are connected directly to the battery
powered at all times.
NOTE:
All accessories connected to the “battery”
powered outlets should be removed or
turned off when the vehicle is not in use to
protect the battery against discharge.
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160
Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt
(13 Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse
protecting the system needs to be replaced.
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlets as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
The front power outlet is located to the right of
the climate controls.
Front Power Outlet
In addition to the front power outlet, there is
also a power outlet located in the storage area
of the center console.
Front Center Console Outlet
If your vehicle is equipped with a rear full center
console, there is also a power outlet located in
the lower storage area of the rear full center
console.
Rear Full Center Console Outlet
The rear cargo power outlet is located in the
right rear cargo area.
Rear Cargo Power Outlet
NOTE:
The rear cargo power outlet can be changed to
“battery” powered at all times by switching the
power outlet right rear quarter panel fuse in the
fuse panel from fuse location F90 to F91.
Rear Cargo Power Outlet Fuse
2
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet
located on the back of the center console to
convert DC current to AC current. This outlet can
power cellular phones, electronics and other
low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain video game consoles
exceed this power limit, as will most power
tools.
Power Inverter
The power inverter is designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of
150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter
automatically shuts down. Once the electrical
device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid
1 — F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet
Console Bin
2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet
Right Rear Quarter Panel
3 — F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter
Instrument Panel
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while
driving the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in
draw power from the vehicle's battery, even
when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will
degrade the battery even more quickly.
Only use these intermittently and with
greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accesso-
ries, or long periods of the vehicle not being
started (with accessories still plugged in),
the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
WIRELESS CHARGING PAD —
I
F EQUIPPED
Wireless Charging Pad
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15W 3A Qi
wireless charging pad located below the center
stack by the cupholders. This charging pad is
designed to wirelessly charge your Qi enabled
mobile phone. Qi is a standard that allows
wireless charging of your mobile phone.
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi
wireless charging. If the phone is not equipped
with Qi wireless charging functionality, an
aftermarket sleeve or a specialized back plate can
be purchased from your mobile phone provider or
a local electronics retailer. Please see your
phone’s owner’s manual for further information.
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an
anti-slip mat, an adjustable cradle to hold your
mobile phone in place, and an LED indicator.
LED Indicator Status:
No Light: Charging pad is idle or searching for
a device.
Blue Light: Device is detected, and is
charging.
Green Light: Device is fully charged.
Red Light/Flashing: Internal error, or foreign
object is detected.
NOTE:
The wireless charging pad will not work if any
of the four doors are open, even if the engine
is running. Opening the liftgate will not inter-
fere with charging pad operation.
Using a phone case may interfere with wire-
less charging.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
The key fob should not be placed on the
charging pad or within 15 cm (150 mm) of it.
Doing so can cause excessive heat buildup
and damage to the fob. Placing the fob in
close proximity of the charging pad blocks the
fob from being detected by the vehicle and
prevents the vehicle from starting.
2
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS
The power window controls are located on the
driver's door trim panel.
Power Window Switches
The passenger door windows can also be
operated by using the single window controls on
the passenger door trim panel. The window
controls will operate only when the ignition is in
the ON/RUN or ACC position.
To open the window part way (manually), push
the switch to the first detent and release it when
you want the window to stop.
The power window controls remain active for up
to 10 minutes after the ignition has been
placed in the OFF position. Opening a vehicle
front door will cancel this feature.
Automatic Window Features
Auto-Down Feature
Both the driver and front passenger window
switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the
window switch past the first detent, release,
and the window will go down automatically.
To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate
the switch in either the up or down direction and
release the switch.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection —
Driver And Front Passenger Door Only
Lift the window switch fully upward to the
second detent, release, and the window will go
up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
switch briefly.
If the window runs into any obstacle during
Auto-Up, it will reverse direction and then go
back down. Remove the obstacle and use the
window switch again to close the window.
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly
during Auto-Up. If this happens, pull the switch
lightly to the first detent and hold it to close the
window manually.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
and do not let children play with power
windows. Do not leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become
entrapped by the windows while operating
the power window switches. Such entrapment
may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands,
fingers and all objects from the window path
before closing.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
window may need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the
window completely and continue to hold the
switch up for an additional two seconds
after the window is closed.
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the
second detent to open the window
completely and continue to hold the switch
down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver's door
trim panel allows you to disable the window
controls on the rear passenger doors. To
disable the window controls, push and release
the window lockout button (the indicator light
on the button will turn on). To enable the
window controls, push and release the window
lockout button again (the indicator light on the
button will turn back off).
Power Window Lockout Switch
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the
perception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle
may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a
normal occurrence and can be minimized. If
the buffeting occurs with the rear windows
open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust
the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting
or open any window.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
2
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
OPENING AND CLOSING THE SUNROOF
Express Open/Close
Push the switch rearward and release it within
one-half second; the sunroof and sunshade will
open automatically and stop at full open
position.
Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will close
automatically from any position.
During Express Open or Express Close
operation, any movement of the sunshade
switch will stop the shade.
Manual Open/Close
Push and hold the switch rearward; the sunroof
and sunshade will open and automatically stop
at full open position.
Push and hold the switch forward and the
sunroof will close from any position and stop at
a full closed position.
Any release of the switch during open or close
operation will stop the sunroof movement. The
sunroof will remain in a partially opened
position until the switch is operated and held
again.
SUNSHADE OPERATION
The sunshade can be opened manually.
However, the sunshade will open automatically
as the sunroof opens.
NOTE:
The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
closing of the sunroof during the Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically
retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts
result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect
will disable and the sunroof must be closed in
Manual Mode.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. Do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the power sunroof
while operating the power sunroof switch.
Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object, to project through
the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
sunroof is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands,
fingers and all objects from the top’s path
before closing.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
VENTING SUNROOF
Push and release the "Vent" button within
one-half second and the sunroof will open to the
vent position. This is called “Express Vent”, and
it will occur regardless of sunroof position.
During Express Vent operation, any movement
of the switch will stop the sunroof.
SUNROOF MAINTENANCE
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth
to clean the glass panel. Periodically check for
and clear out any debris that may have
collected in the tracks.
IGNITION OFF OPERATION
NOTE:
The power sunroof switch can remain active
in Accessory Delay for up to approximately
10 minutes after the vehicle’s ignition is
placed to the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature.
This feature is programmable using the
Uconnect system Ú page 172.
HOOD
OPENING THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be
released.
1. Pull the release lever located underneath
the driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release
2. Reach under the hood from outside the
vehicle, move the safety latch to the left and
lift the hood.
Safety Latch Location
CLOSING THE HOOD
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
could open when the vehicle is in motion and
block your vision. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious injury or death.
2
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
LIFTGATE
POWER LIFTGATE — IF EQUIPPED
The power liftgate may be opened by
pushing the liftgate release handle
Ú page 24 or by pushing the liftgate
button on the key fob. Push the
liftgate button on the key fob twice within five
seconds to open or close the power liftgate.
NOTE:
When using the liftgate button on the key fob
to open the liftgate while the vehicle is
locked, only the liftgate will unlock leaving
the other doors to remain locked. Closing the
liftgate will not re-lock the liftgate. The lock
button on the key fob, or the Passive Entry
lock button must be pushed to re-lock.
When using the Passive Entry button to open
the liftgate, and the vehicle doors unlock (if
“Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is selected in the
Passive Entry settings), the liftgate and
vehicle doors must be locked using the lock
button on the key fob, the Passive Entry lock
button, or the lock buttons on the interior
front door panels.
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed
by pushing the liftgate button located on the
front overhead console. If the liftgate is fully
open, it can be closed by pushing the liftgate
button located on the left rear trim panel. If the
liftgate is in motion, pushing the button again
will reverse the liftgate.
When the liftgate button on the key fob is
pushed two times, the turn signals will flash to
signal that the liftgate is opening or closing (if
Flash Lamps with Lock is enabled in the
Uconnect settings), and the liftgate chime will
be audible. The chime can be turned on or off
through the Uconnect Settings Ú page 172.
NOTE:
In the event of a power malfunction to the lift-
gate, an emergency liftgate latch release can
be used to open the liftgate. The emergency
liftgate latch release can be accessed
through a snap-in cover located on the lift-
gate trim panel.
If liftgate is left open for an extended period
of time, the liftgate may need to be closed
manually to reset power liftgate functionality.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately
12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to
close. Make sure hood is fully closed for both
latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood is
fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or
cargo damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate
travel path is clear. Make sure the liftgate is
closed and latched before driving away.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
NOTE:
The power liftgate buttons will not operate if
the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is
above 0 mph (0 km/h).
The power liftgate will not operate in
temperatures below −22°F (−30°C) or
temperatures above 150°F (65°C). Be sure
to remove any buildup of snow or ice from the
liftgate before pushing any of the power lift-
gate switches.
If anything obstructs the power liftgate while
it is closing or opening, the liftgate will auto-
matically reverse to the closed or open posi-
tion. After multiple obstructions in the same
cycle, the liftgate will automatically stop and
must be opened or closed manually.
There are also pinch sensors attached to the
side of the liftgate. Light pressure anywhere
along these strips will cause the liftgate to
return to the open position.
If the liftgate is only partially open, push the
liftgate button on the key fob twice to operate
the liftgate.
If the liftgate release handle is pushed while
the power liftgate is opening, the liftgate motor
will disengage to allow manual operation.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Storage
There is a removable storage bin located on the
left side of the rear cargo area.
Additional storage can be found in the load
floor. To access the lower storage, lift the
handle and raise the storage lid.
Load Floor Handle
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured
by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed
when you are operating the vehicle.
If you are required to drive with the liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are
closed, and the climate control blower
switch is set at high speed. Do not use the
recirculation mode.
2
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
(Continued)
Retractable Cargo Area Cover —
If Equipped
The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from
shifting or protect passengers from loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
1. Grab the cover at the center handle, and
pull it over the cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into
the slots in the pillar trim cover.
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo
cover in place.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area
floor, should be used to safely secure loads
when the vehicle is moving.
Tie-Down Hooks
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle
could cause injury. It could fly around in a
sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle.
Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor
or in the passenger compartment. Remove the
cover from the vehicle when taken from its
mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
WARNING!
Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or
accident, a tie-down could pull loose and
allow the child seat to come loose. A child
could be badly injured. Use only the
anchors provided for child seat tethers.
To help protect against personal injury,
passengers should not be seated in the
rear cargo area. The rear cargo space is
intended for load carrying purposes only,
not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
The weight and position of cargo and
passengers can change the vehicle center of
gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of
control resulting in personal injury, follow
these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
Do not carry loads that exceed the load
limits described on the label attached to
the left door or left door center pillar.
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo
floor. Put heavier objects as low and as far
forward as possible.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and side rails are designed to
carry weight on vehicles equipped with a
luggage rack. The load must not exceed 150 lbs
(68 kg), and should be uniformly distributed
over the luggage rack crossbars.
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered
stowed within the roof rack side rails. Crossbars
should always be used whenever cargo is
placed on the roof rack. Check the straps
frequently to be sure that the load remains
securely attached.
Roof Rack
The roof rack does not increase the total load
carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the
total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that
on the external rack does not exceed the
maximum vehicle load capacity.
DEPLOYING THE CROSSBARS
1. Starting with one crossbar, completely
loosen the thumb screws at both ends of
the crossbar.
Thumb Screw
NOTE:
The thumb screws cannot be fully removed.
2. Remove the crossbar from the stowed
position by sliding the crossbar towards the
center of the roof. Repeat with the crossbar
on the opposite side.
Place as much cargo as possible in front of
the rear axle. Too much weight or improp-
erly placed weight over or behind the rear
axle can cause the vehicle to sway.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
top of the seatback. This could impair visi-
bility or become a dangerous projectile in a
sudden stop or accident.
WARNING! (Continued)
1 — Side Rail
2 — Crossbar
2
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Removing Crossbars
3. Starting with one crossbar, bend down the
pivot supports at each end.
Bending Pivot
4. Position the crossbars across the roof
making sure the letters on the crossbars
align with the matching letters on the side
rail.
Positioning Crossbars
5. Slide the crossbar into the deploy position
by moving it towards the matching letter in
the side rail. Be sure the crossbar is fully
deployed with the crossbar pushed as far
into the slot as possible. Once the crossbar
is in place, tighten both thumb screws
completely.
Installing Crossbars
6. Deploy and tighten the second crossbar to
complete the deployment of the crossbars.
Deployed Crossbars
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the
crossbars to prevent damage to the vehicle.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
STOWING THE CROSSBARS
1. Starting with one crossbar, completely
loosen the thumb screws at both ends.
Slide the crossbar away from the matching
letter to remove it from the deployed
position. Repeat with the other crossbar.
2. Starting with the one crossbar, bend up the
pivot supports at each end.
Crossbar Pivot
3. Position the crossbar along the correct side
rail. Make sure the letters on the crossbar
align with the matching letters on the side
rail.
Stowing Crossbars
4. Slide the crossbar outward, away from the
center of the roof. The crossbar will nest
fully within the side rail.
Crossbar To Side Rail
5. Once the driver’s side crossbar is in place,
tighten the thumb screws completely.
Tightening Crossbar
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the
crossbars to prevent damage to the vehicle.
2
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
6. Repeat the procedure to stow the second
crossbar on the opposite side.
Stowed Crossbars
NOTE:
To help control wind noise, stow the cross-
bars in the side rails when they are not in use.
If any metallic object is placed over the satel-
lite radio antenna (if equipped), you may
experience interruption of satellite radio
reception.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before
driving your vehicle. Improperly secured loads
can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high
speeds, resulting in personal injury or property
damage. Follow the roof rack cautions when
carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the roof of your
vehicle, DO NOT carry any loads on the roof
rack without the crossbars deployed. The
load should be secured and placed on top
of the crossbars, not directly on the roof. If
it is necessary to place the load on the roof,
place a blanket or other protective layer
between the load and the roof surface.
To avoid damage to the roof rack and
vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof
rack load capacity of 150 lbs (68 kg).
Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as
possible and secure the load appropriately.
Load should always be secured to cross-
bars first, with tie down loops used as addi-
tional securing points if needed. Tie loops
are intended as supplementary tie down
points only. Do not use ratcheting mecha-
nisms with the tie loops. Check the straps
and thumb wheels frequently to be sure
that the load remains securely attached.
Long loads that extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads
with large frontal area should be secured to
both the front and rear of the vehicle.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners
carefully when carrying large or heavy loads
on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural
causes or nearby truck traffic, can add
sudden upward lift to a load. This is espe-
cially true on large flat loads and may result
in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
85
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
3. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within
the normal range indicates that the
engine cooling system is operating satis-
factorily.
3
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather,
up mountain grades, or when towing a
trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed
the upper limits of the normal operating
range.
4. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the Keyless Push Button
Ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points
to the side of the vehicle where
the fuel door is located
Ú page 151.
5. Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display features a
driver interactive display Ú page 86.
Instrument Cluster Display/Controls Location
NOTE:
The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check
when the ignition is first cycled.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument
cluster display, which offers useful information
to the driver. With the ignition in the OFF mode,
opening/closing of a door will activate the
display for viewing, and display the total miles,
or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument
cluster display is designed to display important
information about your vehicle’s systems and
features. Using a driver interactive display
located on the instrument panel, your
instrument cluster display can show how
systems are working and give you warnings
when they are not. The steering wheel mounted
controls allow you to scroll through the main
menus and submenus. You can access the
specific information you want and make
selections and adjustments.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. You may want to call an
authorized dealer for service if your vehicle
overheats Ú page 296.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the
temperature gauge reads “H” pull over and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off
immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 87
LOCATION AND CONTROLS
The instrument cluster display is located in the
center of the instrument cluster.
Instrument Cluster Display/Controls Location
The Main Menu items consists of the following:
Speedometer Main Gauge
Vehicle Info
Performance — If Equipped
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Fuel Economy
Trip
Stop/Start — If Equipped
Trailer Tow — If Equipped
Audio
Messages
Screen Setup
Speed Warning — If Equipped
The system allows the driver to select
information by pushing the following buttons
mounted on the steering wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow
button to scroll upward through the
main menu.
Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down
arrow button to scroll downward
through the main menu.
Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right
arrow button to access the informa-
tion screens or submenu screens
of a main menu item.
Left Arrow Button
Push the left arrow button to
return to the main menu from an
info screen or submenu item.
OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the
information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item. Push and hold the OK
button for one second to reset displayed/
selected features that can be reset.
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
3
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The instrument cluster display is located in the
center portion of the cluster and consist of
multiple sections:
Main Screen — The inner ring of the display
will illuminate in gray under normal condi-
tions, yellow for non critical warnings, red for
critical warnings, and white for on demand
information.
Submenu Dots — Whenever there are
submenus available, the position within the
submenus is shown here.
Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
Gear Selector Status (PRND)
Driver Interactive Display (Compass, Temp,
Range to Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average Fuel
Economy, Current Fuel Economy, Time,
Trailer Trip and Gain)
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Status — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display will normally
display the main menu or the screens of a
selected feature of the main menu. The main
display area also displays “pop up” messages
that consist of approximately 60 possible
warning or information messages. These pop up
messages fall into several categories:
Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this
type of message takes control of the main
display area for five seconds and then
returns to the previous screen. Most of the
messages of this type are then stored (as
long as the condition that activated it
remains active) and can be reviewed from
the “Messages” main menu item. Examples
of this message type are “Right Front Turn
Signal Lamp Out” and “Low Tire Pressure.”
Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or
until the condition that activated the
message is cleared. Examples of this
message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn
signal is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver
leaves the vehicle with the lights on).
Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the
Remote Start feature. This message type is
displayed until the ignition is in the RUN
state. Examples of this message type are
“Remote Start Canceled - Door Ajar” and
“Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to
Start.”
Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this
type of message takes control of the main
display area for five seconds and then returns
to the previous screen. An example of this
message type is “Automatic High Beams On.”
ENGINE OIL LIFE RESET
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Required” message will display in the
instrument cluster display for five seconds after
a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based,
which means the engine oil change interval may
fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. To turn off the message
temporarily, push and release the OK or arrow
buttons. To reset the oil change indicator
system (after performing the scheduled
maintenance), refer to the following procedure.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 89
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter ‘n Go —
Ignition
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster
display controls for the following procedure(s):
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not
start the engine).
2. Push and release the down arrow button
to scroll downward through the main menu
to “Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the right arrow button
to access the ”Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the OK button to reset oil life.
If conditions are met, the gauge and
numeric display will update to show 100%.
If conditions are not met a pop-up message
of “To reset oil life engine must be off with
ignition in run” will be displayed (for five
seconds), and the user will remain at the Oil
Life screen.
5. Push and release the up or down
arrow button to exit the submenu screen.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not
start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly,
three times within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button once to return
the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
DISPLAY AND MESSAGES
Includes the following, but not limited to:
Front Seat Belts Unbuckled
Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled
Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled
Traction Control Off
Washer Fluid Low
Oil Pressure Low
Oil Change Due
Fuel Low
Service Anti-lock Brake System
Service Electronic Throttle Control
Service Power Steering
Cruise Off
Cruise Ready
ACC Override
Cruise Set To XXX mph or km/h
3
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s)
Service Tire Pressure System
Park Brake Engaged
Brake Fluid Low
Engine Temperature Hot
Lights On
Right Front Turn Signal Light Out
Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out
Left Front Turn Signal Light Out
Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out
Ignition or Accessory On
Vehicle Not In Park
Remote Start Active Push Start Button
Remote Start Canceled Fuel Low
Remote Start Canceled Door Open
Remote Start Canceled Hood Open
Remote Start Canceled Liftgate Open
Remote Start Canceled Time Expired
Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset
Service Air Bag System
Service Air Bag Warning Light
Door Open
Doors Open
Liftgate Open
Hood Open
Shift Not Allowed
Vehicle Speed Too High To Shift to D
Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to R
Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P
Service Transmission
Service Shifter
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided
into the white or yellow telltales area on the left,
and the green or red telltales area on the right.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MENU
I
TEMS
The instrument cluster display can be used to
view the main menu items for several features.
Use the up and down arrow buttons to
scroll through the driver interactive display
menu options until the desired menu is
reached.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
Speedometer
Non - SRT
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the main gauge menu icon is
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the left or right arrow
button to select the analog or digital type
speedometer display. Push and release the OK
button to toggle units (mph or km/h) of the
speedometer.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 91
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Vehicle Info icon/title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push the left or right arrow button to
scroll through the information submenus.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle icon
is displayed with tire pressure values in each
corner of the icon.
If one or more tires have low pressure,
“Inflate Tire To XX” is displayed with the
vehicle icon and the tire pressure values in
each corner of the icon with the pressure
value of the low tire are displayed in a
different color than the other tire pressure
value.
If the Tire Pressure system requires service,
“Service Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire Pressure is an information only function,
and cannot be reset Ú page 213.
Transmission Temperature
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
Oil Temperature
Displays the actual oil temperature.
Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
Oil Life
Displays the current oil life of the vehicle.
Battery Voltage
Displays the current voltage level of the
battery.
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Driver Assist display icon/title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display
Ú page 130.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Fuel Economy Menu icon/title is
highlighted. Push the left or right arrow
button to scroll the submenus, one with current
fuel economy display and one without it.
Range
Current MPG, L/100 km, or km/L
Average MPG, L/100 km, or km/L
Press the OK button to reset the average fuel
economy
NOTE:
The Range feature is not able to be reset
through the instrument cluster display controls.
Trip
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Trip icon/title is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display, then push and
release the left or right arrow button to
select Trip A or Trip B.
The Trip A and Trip B information will display the
following:
Distance
Average Fuel Economy
Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset all the information.
3
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trailer Tow — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Trailer Tow Menu icon/title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the left or right arrow
button to select Trailer Trip or Trailer Brake.
Trailer Trip will display the following:
Distance
NOTE:
Press and hold the OK button to reset all the
information.
Trailer Brake will display the following:
Output
Type
Gain
Stop/Start – If Equipped
Push and release the up or
down arrow button on the steering
wheel to scroll to the Stop/Start menu
in the driver interactive display Ú page 125.
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Audio Menu icon/title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display. This
menu will display the audio source information,
including the Song name, Artist name, and audio
source with an accompanying graphic.
Stored Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Messages Menu item is
highlighted. This feature shows the number of
stored warning messages. Pushing the left
or right arrow button will allow you to see
what the stored messages are.
When no messages are present, main menu
icon will be a closed envelope.
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Screen Setup Menu icon/title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the OK button to enter the
submenus and follow the prompts on the
screen as needed. The Screen Setup feature
allows you to change what information is
displayed in the instrument cluster as well as
the location that information is displayed.
Current Gear
On
Off
Gear Display
Full
Single
Favorite Menus
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Driver Assist (Show/Hide)
Fuel Economy (Show/Hide)
Trip (Show/Hide)
Stop/Start
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 93
Trailer Tow (Show/Hide)
Audio (Show/Hide)
Stored Messages
Screen Setup
NOTE:
Menus with (show/hide) can push the OK
button to choose whether to show or hide this
menu on the instrument cluster display.
Upper Left
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range To Empty (RTE)
Fuel Economy Average
Fuel Economy Current
Trip A
Trip B
Trailer Trip
Gain
Upper Right
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range To Empty (RTE)
Fuel Economy Average
Fuel Economy Current
Trip A
Trip B
Trailer Trip
Gain
Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default
Settings)
Restore
Cancel
Speed Warning — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Speed Warning Menu icon/title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the OK button to enter speed
warning. Use the up or down arrow button
to select a desired speed, then push and release
the OK button to set the speed. When the set
speed is exceeded, the indication will light up
yellow and flash along with a pop up message of
“Speed Warning Exceeded” with a continuous
chime (until the speed is no longer exceeded).
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD
R
EDUCTION ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional
monitoring of the electrical system and status
of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system
failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will
take place to extend the driving time and distance
of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power to or
turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is
running. It will display a message if there is a
risk of battery depletion to the point where the
vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical supply,
or will not restart after the current drive cycle.
3
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When load reduction is activated, the message
“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will
appear in the instrument cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery
has a low state of charge and continues to lose
electrical charge at a rate that the charging
system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from
load reduction. The charging system
performs a diagnostic on the charging
system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it
may indicate a problem with the charging
system Ú page 96.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if
equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
affected by load reduction:
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
115 Volt AC Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or
more of the following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system
because the electrical loads are larger than
the capability of the charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical
loads (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and
interior lights, overloaded power outlets
+12 Volt, 115 Volt AC, USB ports) during
certain driving conditions (city driving,
towing, frequent stopping, etc.).
Installing options like additional lights,
upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms and similar devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated
by long parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended
period of time (weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was
not charged completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical
load left on when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period
with the engine not running to supply radio,
lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable appli-
ances like vacuum cleaners, game consoles
and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver On”
or “Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if
possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exte-
rior)
Check what may be plugged in to power
outlets +12 Volt, 115 Volt AC, USB ports
Check HVAC settings (blower, tempera-
ture)
Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and
review specifications if any (load and Ignition
Off Draw currents).
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 95
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
driving time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if
the message is still present during consecu-
tive trips, and if the evaluation and driving
pattern of the vehicle did not help to identify
the cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in
the instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when
applicable. These indications are indicative and
precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to
the information contained in the Owner’s
Manual, which you are advised to read carefully
in all cases. Always refer to the information in
this chapter in the event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable.
The system check menu may appear different
based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and
may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the
driver or passenger seat belt is
unbuckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will
turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on
continuously and a chime will sound
Ú page 216.
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and
will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared.
If the light is either not on during startup, stays
on, or turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various
brake functions, including brake fluid
level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may indicate
that the parking brake is applied, that the brake
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the Anti-Lock Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake
has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it
indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake
Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been
corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either
half of the dual brake system is indicated by the
3
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when
the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn
on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to
the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two
seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the battery is not charging properly. If
it stays on while the engine is running,
there may be a malfunction with the
charging system. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when a
door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Electric Power Steering Fault Warning
Light
This warning light will turn on when
there's a fault with the Electric Power
Steering (EPS) system Ú page 125.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a problem with the ETC
system. If a problem is detected while
the vehicle is running, the light will
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may
have failed. It will take longer to stop the
vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 97
either stay on or flash depending on the nature
of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the
vehicle is safely and completely stopped and
the transmission is placed in the PARK (P)
position. The light should turn off. If the light
remains on with the vehicle running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as
possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and
brake pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as
a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an
overheated engine condition. If the
engine coolant temperature is too
high, this indicator will illuminate and
a single chime will sound. If the temperature
reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will
sound for four minutes or until the engine is
able to cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning
(A/C) system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the
vehicle. If the temperature reading does not
return to normal, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service Ú page 271.
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the hood is left open and not fully
closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A
chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the
engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
temperature to return to normal levels.
3
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the Trailer Brake has been
disconnected Ú page 158.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
— If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
warn of a high transmission fluid
temperature. This may occur with
strenuous usage such as trailer
towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and
run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until
the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you
may continue to drive normally.
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the
vehicle security alarm is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle
is disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an
Onboard Diagnostic System called
OBD II that monitors engine and
automatic transmission control systems. This
warning light will illuminate when the ignition is
in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If
the bulb does not come on when turning the
ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the
condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should
be serviced if the light stays on through several
typical driving styles. In most situations, the
vehicle will drive normally and will not require
towing.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning Light
is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil
over, come in contact with hot engine or
exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission
damage or transmission failure.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 99
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash
to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be
serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light
This warning light will indicate when
the ESC system is Active. The ESC
Indicator Light in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position, and when ESC is activated. It should go
out with the engine running. If the ESC Indicator
Light comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the
ESC system. If this warning light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi-
cator Light come on momentarily each time
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in
an ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light
This warning light indicates the ESC is
off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/
RUN or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be
on, even if it was turned off previously.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the windshield washer fluid is low
Ú page 285.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may
not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances
such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This
could result in death or serious injury to the
driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage
to the vehicle control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and driveability. If the
MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
3
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a
low tire pressure telltale when one or more of
your tires is significantly underinflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if underinflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure
that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches
approximately 2 gal (7.5 L), this light
will turn on and a chime will sound. The
light will remain on until fuel is added.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a
tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using
the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the
tire size equipped on your vehicle.
Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type,
and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire
sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become
inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 101
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS.
The light will turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and may stay on for as
long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is
required as soon as possible. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning
Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position, have the brake system inspected
by an authorized dealer.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the Forward
Collision Warning System. Contact an
authorized dealer for service
Ú page 210.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning
Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is not
operating and needs service
Ú page 130.
Service AWD Warning Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the
All Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not
functioning properly and that service is
required. Contact an authorized dealer.
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the Stop/Start system is not
functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense Warning Light will be
solid yellow when the vehicle is
approaching a lane marker. The
warning light will flash when the
vehicle is crossing the lane marker
Ú page 146.
Service LaneSense Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the LaneSense system is not
operating and requires service.
Please see an authorized dealer.
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the Cruise Control System is
not functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized dealer.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to
indicate that Forward Collision
Warning is off Ú page 210.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Low Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the AWD LOW mode. The
front and rear driveshafts are
mechanically locked together forcing
3
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. AWD LOW is designed for loose, slippery
road surfaces only Ú page 120.
NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
4WD power transfer case is in the
NEUTRAL mode and the front and rear
driveshafts are disengaged from the
powertrain.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set
and a target vehicle is detected
Ú page 130.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without
Target Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set
and a target vehicle is not detected
Ú page 130.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the cruise control is set to the
desired speed Ú page 128.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the front fog lights are on
Ú page 50.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light
illuminates solid green when both
lane markings have been detected
and the system is “armed” and ready
to provide visual and torque warnings if an
unintentional lane departure occurs
Ú page 146.
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when the park lights or headlights are
turned on Ú page 50.
Snow Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when Snow
Mode is active.
Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport
Mode is active Ú page 120.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the Stop/Start function is in
“Autostop” mode Ú page 125.
Tow Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when Tow Mode
is active.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 103
lamps will flash. Turn signals can be activated
when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left) or up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light
— If Equipped
This light will turn on when ACC has
been turned on, but is not set
Ú page 130.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when the cruise control is ready, but
not set Ú page 128.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON,
but not armed, the LaneSense
indicator light illuminates solid white.
This occurs when only left, right, or
neither lane line has been detected. If a single
lane line is detected, the system is ready to
provide only visual warnings if an unintentional
lane departure occurs on the detected lane line
Ú page 146.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam
headlights are on. With the low beams
activated, push the multifunction
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction
lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to
turn off the high beams. If the high beams are
off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary
high beam on, “flash to pass” scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as
engine emissions well within current
government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD
II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes
and other information to assist your service
technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be driveable and not need
towing, see an authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
3
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have an OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information
related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may
need to access this information to assist with
the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system Ú page 171.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement
to pass an inspection of your vehicle's
emissions control system. Failure to pass could
prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection
and Maintenance (I/M), this check
verifies the “Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the
OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The
OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle
was recently serviced, recently had a depleted
battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II
system should be determined not ready for the
I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission
control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must
be serviced before any emissions tests can
be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to read the VIN,
diagnose, or service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to
the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an acci-
dent involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 105
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test
station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to
the ON position, you will see the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) symbol
come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds
and then return to being fully illuminated
until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is not ready and you
should not proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will
remain fully illuminated until you place
the ignition in the off position or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should
see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do
nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD II system
to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation you should
have your vehicle serviced before going to the
I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle
because the MIL is on with the engine running.
3
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten
your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL (N) or
PARK (P) position before you can start the
engine. Apply the brakes before shifting into any
driving gear.
NORMAL STARTING
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK (P).
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while
pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and apply the
parking brake.
Always make sure the keyless ignition node
is in the OFF mode, key fob is removed from
the vehicle and vehicle is locked.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
Do not shift from REVERSE (R), PARK, or
NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the
engine is above idle speed.
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop and the engine is at idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
STARTING AND OPERATING 107
3. The system starts the vehicle. If the vehicle
fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the
engine prior to the engine starting, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button again.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP
button. The ignition will return to the OFF
mode.
2. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held
for two seconds or three short pushes in a
row with the vehicle speed above 5 mph
(8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The
ignition will remain in the ACC mode until
the gear selector is in PARK and the button
is pushed twice to the OFF mode.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed
once with the vehicle speed above 5 mph
(8 km/h), the instrument cluster will
display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message
and the engine will remain running. Never
leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or
it could roll.
NOTE:
If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once
with the vehicle speed below 5 mph (8 km/h),
the engine will shut off and the ignition will
remain in the ACC position. If vehicle speed
drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the vehicle
will AutoPark. See AutoPark section for further
details.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates
similar to an ignition switch. It has three modes:
OFF, ACC, and RUN. To change the ignition
modes without starting the vehicle and use the
accessories, follow these directions:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF mode.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once
to place the ignition to the ACC mode.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to place the ignition to the RUN
mode.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
third time to return the ignition to the OFF
mode.
NOTE:
Only press one pedal at a time while driving the
vehicle. Torque performance of the vehicle
could be reduced if both pedals are pressed at
the same time. If pressure is detected on both
pedals simultaneously, a warning message will
display in the instrument cluster Ú page 86.
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in
placing the vehicle in PARK (P) if the below
occur. It is a back up system and should not be
relied upon as the primary method by which the
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will
engage are outlined on the following pages.
4
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns
off the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these
conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed trans-
mission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Ignition switched from RUN to ACC
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter ‘n Go equipped vehicles, the
engine will turn off and the ignition switch will
change to ACC mode.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits
the vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle
may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these
conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed trans-
mission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
Driver’s door is ajar
Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then
Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument
cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. In these
cases, the gear selector must be returned to “P”
to select desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the
vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed
is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “Vehicle Speed is Too High to
Shift to P” will be displayed in the instrument
cluster if vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h).
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to
place the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A
VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK
by verifying that a solid (not blinking) “P” is
indicated in the instrument cluster display
and on the gear selector. If the "P" indicator
is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As
an added precaution, always apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your
vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system
and should not be relied upon as the
primary method by which the driver shifts
the vehicle into PARK.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h),
the transmission will default to NEUTRAL until
the vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h). A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL
position can roll. As an added precaution,
always apply the parking brake when exiting
the vehicle.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
STARTING AND OPERATING 109
(Continued)
4WD LOW — If Equipped
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the
vehicle in 4WD LOW.
The message “AutoPark Disabled” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given
when both of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is not in PARK
Driver’s door is ajar
The message “AutoPark Not Engaged” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning
chime will continue until you shift the vehicle
into PARK or the driver’s door is closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle
is in PARK by looking for the "P" in the
instrument cluster display and on the gear
selector. As an added precaution, always apply
the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have
followed the "Normal Starting" or "Extreme Cold
Weather" procedure, it may be flooded. Push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than
15 seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in
case the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition
key in the RUN position, release the accelerator
pedal and repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could
result in flash fire causing serious personal
injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission cannot be started
this way. Unburned fuel could enter the
catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a
start from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly Ú page 268.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
continuously crank the engine for more than
25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds
before trying again.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 STARTING AND OPERATING
COLD WEATHER OPERATION (BELOW
–22°F O
R −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these
temperatures, use of an externally powered
electric engine block heater (available from an
authorized dealer) is recommended.
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and
it will decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect
the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC
electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire
extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at
least one hour to have an adequate warming
effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is located:
3.6L Engine — Bundled and strapped behind
the engine air cleaner assembly.
5.7L Engine — Bundled and strapped in front
of the power distribution center.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the
engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
Brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits
of local traffic laws contributes to a good
break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low
gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the
factory is a high-quality energy conserving type
lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with
anticipated climate conditions under which
vehicle operations will occur. For the
recommended viscosity and quality grades see
Ú page 340.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight
Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may
result.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
STARTING AND OPERATING 111
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-
tion. This should be considered a normal part of
the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.
Please check your oil level with the engine oil
indicator often during the break-in period. Add
oil as required.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully applied and place the gear
selector in the PARK (P) position.
The foot operated parking brake is located
below the lower left corner of the instrument
panel. To apply the parking brake, firmly push
the parking brake pedal fully. To release the
parking brake, press the parking brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the
brake disengage.
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the
ignition switch in the ON/RUN mode, the Brake
Warning Light in the instrument cluster will
illuminate.
NOTE:
When the parking brake is applied and the
transmission is placed in gear, the Brake
Warning Light will flash. If vehicle speed is
detected, a chime will sound to alert the
driver. Fully release the parking brake before
attempting to move the vehicle.
This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade. Apply the parking brake before placing
the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make
it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.
4
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the ignition and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the keyless ignition node is in the OFF
mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle
and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-
gaged before driving; failure to do so can
lead to brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and
cause damage or injury. Also be certain to
leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to
do so may allow the vehicle to roll and
cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake
system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Never use the PARK (P) position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
STARTING AND OPERATING 113
(Continued)
(Continued)
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be
in PARK (P) before the ignition can be turned to
the OFF mode. This helps the driver avoid
inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
the transmission in PARK. This system also
locks the transmission in PARK whenever the
ignition is in the OFF mode.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when
the ignition is in the ACC mode (even though the
engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission
is in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC
mode) before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL (N) if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse.
You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE (R)
only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE (D) when the engine is
above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
CAUTION! (Continued)
4
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 STARTING AND OPERATING
BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) S YSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that
holds the transmission gear selector in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift
from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
FUEL ECONOMY (ECO) MODE
The Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improve the
vehicle's overall fuel economy during normal
driving conditions. Push the ECO button in the
center stack of the instrument panel to activate
or disable ECO mode. A light on the button
indicates when ECO mode is disabled.
ECO OFF Button
When the Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode is enabled,
the vehicle control systems will change the
following:
The transmission will upshift sooner and
downshift later.
The overall driving performance will be more
conservative.
Some ECO mode functions may be tempo-
rarily inhibited based on temperature and
other factors.
EIGHT-SPEED AUTOMATIC
T
RANSMISSION
The transmission gear range is displayed both
on the gear selector and in the instrument
cluster. To select a gear range, push the lock
button on the gear selector and move the
selector rearward or forward. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed.
You must also press the brake pedal to shift
from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE:
The transmission electronics are self-cali-
brating; therefore, the first few shifts on a
new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is
a normal condition, and precision shifts will
develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
STARTING AND OPERATING 115
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission
gear (for example, driver selects PARK while
driving), the position indicator will blink
continuously until the selector is returned to
the proper position, or the requested shift
can be completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission
adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs,
along with environmental and road conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE
when the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on
the brake pedal when shifting between these
gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and MANUAL
(AutoStick) shift positions. Manual shifts can be
made using the AutoStick shift control. Toggling
the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+)
while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position
(beside the DRIVE position), or tapping the shift
paddles (+/-) (if equipped) will manually select
the transmission gear, and will display the
current gear in the instrument cluster
Ú page 119.
Transmission Gear Selector
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the
PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when
pushed forward) it is probably in the MANUAL
(AutoStick, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE posi-
tion). In MANUAL (AutoStick) mode, the trans-
mission gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster (as 1, 2, 3, etc.). Move the gear selector
to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for
access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when
shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment
to allow the selected gear to engage before
accelerating. This is especially important when
the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use
PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward
the curb on a downhill grade and away from the
curb on an uphill grade.
NOTE:
On vehicles equipped with the electronically
shifted transfer case, ensure that the transfer
case is in AWD AUTO or LOW RANGE position on
the AWD Control Switch. Ensure that the
NEUTRAL position light is NOT illuminated.
1 — Gear Selector
2 — Lock Button
4
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
(Continued)
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the ignition OFF.
Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK (P) position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL (N) if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse.
You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING! (Continued)
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
STARTING AND OPERATING 117
(Continued)
The following indicators should be used to
ensure that you have properly engaged the
transmission into the PARK position:
When shifting into PARK, push the lock
button on the gear selector and firmly move
the selector all the way forward until it stops
and is fully seated.
Look at the transmission gear position
display and verify that it indicates the PARK
position (P), and is not blinking.
With brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running.
Apply the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK (P) if you must exit the
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear
selector out of PARK, you must start the
engine, and also press the brake pedal.
Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
WARNING! (Continued)
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range,
as this can damage the drivetrain.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off
the ignition to coast down a hill. These are
unsafe practices that limit your response to
changing traffic or road conditions. You might
lose control of the vehicle and have a
collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in
NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission
damage.
For Recreational Towing Ú page 164.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 275.
4
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest
upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs
(such as when operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain,
traveling into strong head winds, or while towing
a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control
to select a lower gear Ú page 119. Under these
conditions, using a lower gear will improve
performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During cold temperatures, transmission
operation may be modified depending on
engine and transmission temperature as well
as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm
up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of
the torque converter clutch is inhibited until the
transmission fluid is warm. Normal operation
will resume once the transmission temperature
has risen to a suitable level.
Manual (M)
The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE
position) enables full manual control of
transmission shifting (also known as AutoStick
mode Ú page 119). Toggling the gear selector
forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL
(AutoStick) position will manually select the
transmission gear, and will display the current
gear in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored
electronically for abnormal conditions. If a
condition is detected that could result in
transmission damage, Transmission Limp
Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the
transmission may operate only in certain gears,
or may not shift at all. Vehicle performance may
be severely degraded and the engine may stall.
In some situations, the transmission may not
re-engage if the engine is turned off and
restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may be illuminated. A message in the
instrument cluster will inform the driver of the
more serious conditions, and indicate what
actions may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage
after engine shutdown, perform this procedure
only in a desired location (preferably, at an
authorized dealer):
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), if
possible. If not, shift the transmission to
NEUTRAL (N).
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
engine turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal
operation.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
STARTING AND OPERATING 119
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer
at your earliest possible convenience. An autho-
rized dealer has diagnostic equipment to
assess the condition of your transmission. If the
transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
AutoStick — If Equipped
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving
you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick
allows you to maximize engine braking,
eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This
system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery
conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and
many other situations.
Operation
In AutoStick mode, you can use the gear
selector (in the MANUAL position), or the shift
paddles to the MANUAL (M) position (beside the
DRIVE (D) position), or tap one of the shift
paddles on the steering wheel. Tapping the (-)
shift paddle to enter AutoStick mode will
downshift the transmission to the next lower
gear, while tapping (+) to enter AutoStick mode
will retain the current gear. The current
transmission gear will be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
NOTE:
The shift paddles (if equipped) may be disabled
using the Uconnect Personal Settings.
AutoStick mode has the following operational
benefits:
The transmission will automatically down-
shift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine
lugging) and will display the current gear.
The transmission will automatically down-
shift to FIRST gear when coming to a stop.
After a stop, the driver should manually
upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle is
accelerated.
You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or
SECOND gear. Tapping (+) at a stop will allow
starting in SECOND gear. Starting out in
SECOND gear can be helpful in snowy or icy
conditions.
If a requested downshift would cause the
engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at
too low of a vehicle speed.
Holding the (-) paddle pressed, or holding the
gear selector in the (-) position, will downshift
the transmission to the lowest gear possible
at the current speed.
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable
when AutoStick is enabled.
The system may revert to automatic shift
mode if a fault or overheat condition is
detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear
selector to the DRIVE (D) position, or press and
hold the (+) shift paddle until "D" is indicated in
the instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of
AutoStick mode at any time without taking your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine
braking on a slippery surface. The drive
wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle
could skid, causing a collision or personal
injury.
4
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 STARTING AND OPERATING
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with a SPORT Mode
feature. The engine, transmission, and steering
systems are all set to their SPORT settings.
SPORT Mode will provide improved throttle
response and modified transmission shift
points for an enhanced driving experience, as
well as greater amount of steering feel. This
mode may be activated and deactivated by
pushing the SPORT button on the instrument
panel switch bank.
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
SINGLE-SPEED OPERATING
I
NSTRUCTIONS /PRECAUTIONS — IF
E
QUIPPED
This system contains a single-speed (HI range
only) transfer case, which provides convenient
full-time All-Wheel Drive (AWD). No driver
interaction is required. The Brake Traction
Control (BTC) System, which combines standard
ABS and Traction Control, provides resistance
to any wheel that is slipping to allow additional
torque transfer to wheels with traction.
NOTE:
This system is not appropriate for conditions
where AWD Low is recommended Ú page 168.
ELECTRONICALLY SHIFTED TRANSFER
C
ASE (TWO-POSITION SWITCH ) —
I
F EQUIPPED
This is an electronically shifted transfer case
and it is operated by the AWD control switch,
which is located on the center console.
AWD Control Switch (Two-Position)
This electronically shifted transfer case
provides two mode positions:
All-wheel drive low range (AWD LOW)
N (NEUTRAL)
When additional traction is required, the
transfer case AWD LOW position can be used to
lock the front and rear driveshafts together
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This is accomplished by pushing
the AWD LOW switch Ú page 122. The AWD
LOW position is designed for loose, slippery
road surfaces only. Driving in the AWD LOW
position on dry, hard surfaced roads may cause
increased tire wear and damage to the driveline
components.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Messages
The Transfer Case Position Indicator message
(AWD LOW) is located in the instrument cluster
and indicate the current and desired transfer
case selection Ú page 86. When you select a
different transfer case position, the position
indicator lights will do the following:
If All Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn
off.
2. The selected position indicator light will
flash until the transfer case completes the
shift.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
STARTING AND OPERATING 121
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator
light for the selected position will stop
flashing and remain on.
If shift conditions are not met, one or more of
the following events may occur:
1. The indicator light for the current position
will remain on.
2. The newly selected position indicator light
will continue to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE:
Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new
transfer case position have been met
Ú page 122.
The “SERV AWD” Warning Light monitors the
electronic shift all-wheel drive system. If this
light remains on after engine start up or
illuminates during driving, it means that the
all-wheel drive system is not functioning
properly and that service is required.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. This could
cause damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in AWD LOW, the
engine speed is approximately three times that
of the AWD AUTO position at a given road speed.
Take care not to overspeed the engine and do
not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of all-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference in
tire size can cause damage to the transfer case.
Because all-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe
turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster
than road conditions permit.
For additional information on the appropriate
use of each transfer case mode position, see
the information below:
AWD LOW
All-Wheel Drive Low Range – This range
provides low speed all-wheel drive. Locks the
front and rear driveshafts together forcing the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. Additional traction and maximum pulling
power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do
not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
NEUTRAL (N)
This range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for
flat towing behind another vehicle Ú page 164.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when
powering down the vehicle if the “SERV AWD
Warning Light” is illuminated. Not engaging
the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll
which may cause personal injury.
4
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 STARTING AND OPERATING
SHIFTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, the
transfer case will not shift. The position indi-
cator light for the previous position will
remain on and the newly selected position
indicator light will continue to flash until all
the requirements for the selected position
have been met. To retry a shift: return the
control switch back to the original position,
make certain all shift requirements have
been met, wait five seconds and try the shift
again.
If all the requirements to select a new transfer
case position have been met, the current position
indicator light will turn off, the selected position
indicator light will flash until the transfer case
completes the shift. When the shift is complete,
the position indicator light for the selected posi-
tion will stop flashing and remain on.
AWD Auto To AWD Low
NOTE:
When shifting into or out of AWD LOW some gear
noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is
not detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle
rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely
stopped. Use either of the following procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle
to 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, push the AWD LOW control
switch.
4. After the AWD LOW position indicator light is
on (not flashing), shift the transmission
back into gear.
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
2. With the ignition in ON/RUN position and
engine running, shift the transmission to
NEUTRAL.
3. Push the AWD LOW control switch.
4. After the AWD LOW position indicator light is
on (not flashing), shift the transmission
back into gear.
NOTE:
If steps 1 or 2 of either the “Preferred” or
“Alternate Procedure” are not satisfied prior
to attempting the shift or if they no longer are
being met while the shift attempt is in
process, the desired position indicator light
will flash continuously while the original posi-
tion indicator light is on, until all require-
ments have been met.
The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN
position for a shift to take place and for the
position indicator lights to be operable. If the
ignition switch is not in the ON/RUN position,
then the shift will not take place and no posi-
tion indicator lights will be on or flashing.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the NEUTRAL position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case NEUTRAL position disengages both the
front and rear drive shafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when
the driver is not in the vehicle.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
STARTING AND OPERATING 123
NEUTRAL Shift Procedure
For information regarding the transfer case
NEUTRAL (N) shift procedure, see Ú page 166.
TOW N GO — IF EQUIPPED
Tow N Go combines the capabilities of the
vehicle control systems, along with driver input,
to provide optimum performance for road
conditions.
Push any one of the four drive mode buttons to
select the desired mode.
Drive Mode Buttons
Tow N Go consists of the following positions:
TRACK – Track mode optimizes settings for
transmission, engine, driveline, and suspen-
sion in order to maximize vehicle perfor-
mance. Also the electric power steering
offers more feedback of the tire gripping the
road. This feature will reset to AUTO upon an
ignition cycle. To turn off Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) Ú page 203.
SPORT – Dry weather, on-road calibration.
Performance based tuning that provides a
rear-wheel drive feel but with improved
handling and acceleration over a two-wheel
drive vehicle. This feature will reset to AUTO
upon an ignition cycle.
TOW – Tow drive mode also optimizes the
transmission shifting for towing, as well as
maximizing straight line traction by opti-
mizing driveline settings on AWD system. Use
this mode for towing and hauling heavy
loads. Vehicle suspension will go to SPORT
mode. Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is enabled
in the ESC system. This feature will reset to
AUTO upon an ignition cycle.
SNOW – Tuning set for additional stability in
inclement weather. Use on and off-road on
loose traction surfaces such as snow. This
feature will reset to AUTO upon an ignition
cycle.
GUIDELINES FOR TRACK USE
If your vehicle is equipped with Drive Modes,
they will alter the vehicle’s performance in
various driving situations. It is recommended
that your vehicle operates in SPORT or
TRACK modes during the track event.
Prior to each track event, verify all fluids are
at the correct levels.
Prior to each track event, verify the front and
rear brake pads have more than half pad
thickness remaining. If the brake pads
require changing, complete a brake burnish
procedure prior to track outing at full pace.
NOTE:
Use of DOT 4 brake fluid is suggested for
extended track usage due to increased thermal
capacity.
1 — TRACK
2 — SPORT
3 — TOW
4 — SNOW
4
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 STARTING AND OPERATING
At the conclusion of each track event, it is
recommended that a brake bleed procedure
is performed to maintain the pedal feel and
stopping capability of your Brembo High
Performance brake system.
It is recommended that each track outing
should end with a minimum of one cooldown
lap using minimal braking.
It is recommended that the suspension
system, brake system, prop shaft, and half
shaft boots be checked for wear or damage
after every track event.
Track usage results in increased operating
temperatures of the engine, transmission,
driveline and brake system. This may affect
Noise Vibration Harshness (NVH) countermea-
sures designed into your vehicle. New compo-
nents may need to be installed to return the
system to the original NVH performance.
Tire pressure:
Recommended tire pressure of 33 psi
(230 kPa) when tires are cold, or below
42 psi (290 kPa) when hot.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you target below 42 psi
(290 kPa) when tires are hot at the conclusion of
each track session. Starting at 33 psi (230 kPa)
cold and adjusting based on ambient and track
conditions is recommended. Tire pressure can be
monitored via the instrument cluster display and
can assist with adjustments.
Track burnishing your brakes
To avoid “green lining fade” during track use,
the brake pads and rotors must have a thermal
burnish for factory-installed components or
when new brake friction components are
installed:
1. Use one track session to burnish brakes by
driving at 75% speed. Brake at approxi-
mately 0.60 - 0.80g max without Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) intervention.
2. Complete one lap in this manner until you
start smelling the brakes. Continue for
another half lap at speed, then complete a
two lap cooldown with minimal brake
applications. Ensure the brakes are not
smoking. If they are, complete another
cooldown lap.
3. Getting the brakes to smoke is an indication
that the brakes have overheated and may
negatively affect future track usage.
4. Allow vehicle to sit and cool for at least
30 minutes. If an infrared thermal gun is
available, allow rotors to cool to 200°F
(93.3°C) before returning to the track.
5. There should be a thin layer of ash when
inspecting the brake pads. Having the ash
layer go more than half the thickness of the
pad material is a sign of an overly
aggressive burnish.
6. Occasionally, a second burnish session is
required. If the brake pads begin to emit an
odor during the next track session, reduce
vehicle speed and braking deceleration rate
to burnish targets and follow steps 2-4.
7. New brake pads installed on old rotors
require a burnish. New rotors installed with
old brake pads should be burnished at the
track or driven for 300 miles (485 km) of city
driving to develop an adequate lining transfer
layer on the rotor surface prior to track use.
8. Rotors that pulsate during track use should
be replaced.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
STARTING AND OPERATING 125
NOTE:
Resurfacing of the rotors is not recommended,
as it removes mass from the rotor, reducing its
thermal capacity. Resurfacing also thins the
rotor cheek, making it less robust and
increasing the likelihood of pulsation in further
track use.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ONLY —
IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by
shutting off four of the engine's eight cylinders
during light load and cruise conditions. The
system is automatic with no driver inputs.
NOTE:
This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will provide
increased vehicle response and ease of
maneuverability. The power steering system
adapts to different driving conditions and
adjusts accordingly.
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be
selected through the Uconnect System
Ú page 172.
If the Electric Power Steering warning icon is
displayed and the “SERVICE POWER STEERING”
or the “POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF –
SERVICE SYSTEM” message is displayed within
the instrument cluster display, this indicates the
vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service Ú page 95.
NOTE:
Even if the power steering assistance is no
longer operational, it is still possible to steer
the vehicle. Under these conditions there will
be a substantial increase in steering effort,
especially at low speeds and during parking
maneuvers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized
dealer for service.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the
“POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP”
message is displayed on the instrument cluster
screen, this indicates an over temperature
condition in the power steering system. Once
driving conditions are safe, pull over and let the
vehicle idle for a few moments until the icon
and message turn off.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce
fuel consumption. The system will stop the
engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the
required conditions are met. Releasing the
brake pedal or pressing the accelerator pedal
will automatically re-start the engine.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy
duty starter, enhanced battery, and other
upgraded engine parts, to handle the additional
engine starts.
AUTOSTOP MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every
normal customer engine start. At that time, the
system will go into STOP/START READY.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible.
4
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following
Must Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY
state. A STOP/START READY message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster display
within the Stop/Start section Ú page 86.
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
The gear selector must be in a forward gear
and the brake pedal pressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will
move to the zero position and the Stop/Start
telltale will illuminate indicating you are in
Autostop. Customer settings will be maintained
upon return to an engine running condition.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES
N
OT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check
many safety and comfort conditions to see if
they are fulfilled. Detailed information about the
operation of the Stop/Start system may be
viewed in the instrument cluster display Stop/
Start Screen. In the following situations, the
engine will not stop:
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
Driver’s door is not closed.
Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
Battery charge is low.
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high
blower speed.
HVAC set to MAX A/C.
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
The transmission is not in a forward gear.
Hood is open.
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient
pressure.
Accelerator pedal input.
Engine temp too high.
5 mph (8 km/h) threshold not achieved from
previous Autostop.
Steering angle beyond threshold.
ACC is on and speed is set.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
several times without the Stop/Start system
going into a STOP/START READY state under
more extreme conditions of the items listed
above.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
A
UTOSTOP MODE
While in a forward gear, the engine will start
when the brake pedal is released or the throttle
pedal is pressed. The transmission will
automatically re-engage upon engine restart.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
STARTING AND OPERATING 127
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
The transmission selector is moved out of
DRIVE.
To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is
manually adjusted.
Battery voltage drops too low.
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
A Stop/Start system error occurs.
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Stop/Start OFF Switch
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will
illuminate. The “STOP/START OFF” message
will appear in the instrument cluster display and
the autostop mode will be disabled Ú page 86.
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to
the ON mode every time the ignition is turned
OFF and back ON.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will turn
off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start
system, the system will not shut down the
engine. A “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display Ú page 95.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message appears in the instrument cluster
display, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise
Control system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) system:
Cruise Control for cruising at a constant
preset speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) for maintaining
a set distance between you and the vehicle
ahead using Fixed Speed Cruise Control to
automatically adjust the preset speed.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with ACC, if an ACC
distance is not set, Fixed Speed Cruise Control
will not detect vehicles directly ahead of you.
Always be aware of the mode selected.
4
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 STARTING AND OPERATING
CRUISE CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
20 mph (32 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Cruise Control Buttons
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the Cruise
Control system has been designed to shut down
if multiple Cruise Control functions are operated
at the same time. If this occurs, the Cruise
Control system can be reactivated by pushing
the Cruise Control on/off button and resetting
the desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise
Control. “CRUISE CONTROL READY” will appear in
the instrument cluster display to indicate the
Cruise Control is on. To turn the system off, push
the on/off button a second time. “CRUISE
CONTROL OFF” will appear in the instrument
cluster display to indicate the Cruise Control is off.
The system should be turned off when not in use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the SET
(+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the
selected speed. Once a speed has been set, a
message “CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/
h)” will appear indicating what speed was set. A
cruise indicator lamp, along with set speed will
also appear and stay on in the instrument
cluster when the speed is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or
decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
1 — On/Off
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (+)/Accel
4 — RES/Resume
5 — SET (-)/Decel
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the
conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could
accidentally set the system or cause it to go
faster than you want. You could lose control
and have an accident. Always leave the
system OFF when you are not using it.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
STARTING AND OPERATING 129
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment.
Each subsequent tap of the button results in
an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
Using Cruise Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
NOTE:
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
occur so it may be preferable to drive without
Cruise Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button,
or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle
will deactivate the Cruise Control system without
erasing the set speed from memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the
Cruise Control without erasing the set speed
from memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition
in the OFF position will erase the set speed from
memory.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the
conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
4
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
I
F EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the
driving convenience provided by Cruise Control
while traveling on highways and major
roadways. However, it is not a safety system
and not designed to prevent collisions. The
Cruise Control function performs differently
Ú page 128.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control
engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions
without the constant need to reset your Cruise
Control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead,
ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration
(not to exceed the original set speed) auto-
matically to maintain a preset following
distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
Any chassis / suspension or tire size modifi-
cations to the vehicle will affect the perfor-
mance of the Adaptive Cruise Control and
Forward Collision Warning system.
Fixed Speed Cruise Control alone (an ACC
distance not set) will not detect vehicles
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the
mode selected Ú page 346.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-
nience system. It is not a substitute for active
driver involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic,
and weather conditions, vehicle speed,
distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most
importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road condi-
tions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe
control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death
or serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians,
oncoming vehicles, and stationary
objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be
limited upon adverse sight distance
conditions.
Does not always fully recognize
complex driving conditions, which can
result in wrong or missing distance
warnings.
Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
while following a target vehicle and hold
the vehicle for 2 seconds in the stop
position. If the target vehicle does not
start moving within two seconds the
ACC system will display a message that
the system will release the brakes and
that the brakes must be applied manu-
ally. An audible chime will sound when
the brakes are released.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
STARTING AND OPERATING 131
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering
wheel operate the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the
current ACC system settings. The information it
displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button until one of the following appears in the
instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is
pushed, the display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the
instrument cluster display.
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
driving situations (i.e., in highway construc-
tion zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp; when driving on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or
have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep
slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
WARNING! (Continued)
1 — CANC/Cancel
2 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off
3 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
4 — Distance Decrease Button
5 — SET (+)/Accel
6 — RES/Resume
7 — SET (-)/Decel
8 — Distance Increase Button
4
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 STARTING AND OPERATING
The ACC screen may display once again if any of
the following ACC activity occurs:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the
last display selected after five seconds of no
ACC display activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready
state, the instrument cluster display will read
“ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster
display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
When in 4WD Low
When the brakes are applied
When the parking brake is applied
When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
REVERSE or NEUTRAL
When the vehicle speed is below the
minimum speed range
When the brakes are overheated
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at
low speeds
When there is a stationary vehicle in front of
your vehicle in close proximity
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
again. At this time, the system will turn off and
the instrument cluster displays “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) Off.”
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it
to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have a collision. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
STARTING AND OPERATING 133
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired,
push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button
and release. The instrument cluster display will
show the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without
an ACC distance set. To change between the
different modes, push the ACC on/off button
which turns the ACC and the Fixed Speed Cruise
Control off. Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise
Control on/off button will result in turning on
(changing to) Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed will default to
20 mph (20 km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below
20 mph (32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall
be the current speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal
can cause the vehicle to continue to accel-
erate beyond the set speed. If this occurs, the
message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the instrument cluster display.
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed while an ACC distance is also set, the
system will not be controlling the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
The vehicle speed will only be determined by
the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed
Speed Cruise Control systems:
The brake pedal is applied
The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction
Control System (ESC/TCS) activates
The vehicle parking brake is applied
The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) activates
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode
The braking temperature exceeds normal
range (overheated)
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC
system:
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
Driver door is opened at low speeds
WARNING!
In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode, the system will not react to vehicles
ahead. In addition, the proximity warning
does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead
since neither the presence of the vehicle
ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is
detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
Always be aware which mode is selected.
4
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed
in memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button is pushed
The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
4WD Low is engaged
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES
(resume) button and remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster
display will show the last set speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed
Cruise Control is being used.
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph
(0 km/h) when ACC is active.
NOTE:
While in ACC mode when the vehicle comes
to a complete stop longer than two seconds,
the system will cancel. The driver will have to
apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at a
standstill.
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a
stationary vehicle in front of your vehicle in
close proximity.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set
speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or
decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 5 mph incre-
ments until the button is released. The new
set speed is reflected in the instrument
cluster display.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming
a set speed that is too high or too low for
prevailing traffic and road conditions could
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate
too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision
and death or serious personal injury.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
STARTING AND OPERATING 135
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment.
Each subsequent tap of the button results in
an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released. The
new set speed is reflected in the instrument
cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+) button
or SET (-) button, the new set speed will be the
current speed of the vehicle.
When An ACC Distance Is Also Set:
When you use the SET (-) button to decel-
erate, if the engine’s braking power does not
slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set
speed, the brake system will automatically
slow the vehicle.
The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a
full stop when following the vehicle in front. If
your vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a
standstill, after two seconds the driver will
either have to push the RES (resume) button,
or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage
the ACC to the existing set speed.
The ACC system maintains set speed when
driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal. In
addition, downshifting may occur while
climbing uphill or descending downhill. This
is normal operation and necessary to main-
tain set speed. When driving uphill and down-
hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking
temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be
set by varying the distance setting between four
bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars
(medium) and one bar (short). Using this
distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle
ahead. This distance setting appears in the
instrument cluster display.
Distance Settings
To increase the distance setting, push the
Distance Increase button and release. Each
time the button is pushed, the distance setting
increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the
Distance Decrease button and release. Each
time the button is pushed, the distance setting
decreases by one bar (shorter).
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
3 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
4
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 STARTING AND OPERATING
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will
maintain the set speed. If a slower moving
vehicle is detected in the same lane, the
instrument cluster display will show the ACC Set
With Target Detected Indicator Light. The
system will then adjust the vehicle speed
automatically to maintain the distance setting,
regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance
until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed
above the set speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
view of the sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages Ú page 132.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
however, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC
predicts that its maximum braking level is not
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this
occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will flash in the
instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its
maximum braking capacity.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action
and does not necessarily mean that the
Forward Collision Warning system is applying
the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
engaged and following a vehicle, the system will
provide an additional acceleration up to the ACC
set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This
additional acceleration is triggered when the
driver utilizes the left turn signal and will only be
active when passing on the left hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a
standstill while following a vehicle ahead, your
vehicle will resume motion, without any driver
interaction, if the vehicle ahead starts moving
within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill.
If the vehicle in front does not start moving
within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, the driver will either have to push the
RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator
pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing set
speed.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a
standstill, if the driver seat belt is unbuckled or
the driver door is opened, the ACC with Stop
system will cancel and the brakes will release. A
cancel message will display on the instrument
cluster display and produce a warning chime.
The driver must now manually operate the
vehicle’s accelerator and brakes.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
STARTING AND OPERATING 137
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning will display and also a chime
will indicate when conditions temporarily limit
system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system
may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will display
the above message and the system will
deactivate.
This message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice
and snow, or tunnels with reflective tiles). The
ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left
these areas. Under rare conditions, when the
radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in
its path this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise
Control is still available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the sensor. It may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The
sensor is located in the center of the vehicle
behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance
items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe
the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious
not to damage the sensor lens.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
Doing so could cause an ACC system
malfunction or failure and require a sensor
realignment.
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is
damaged due to a collision, see an autho-
rized dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near
the sensor, including transparent material or
aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an
ACC system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system
is no longer present, the system will return to
the “Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will
resume function by simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front
Radar Sensor” message occurs frequently
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without
any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction,
have the radar sensor realigned at an autho-
rized dealer.
Installing a snow plow, front-end protector,
an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is
not recommended. Doing so may block the
sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW operation.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
4
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 STARTING AND OPERATING
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” warning will display, and a
chime will sound when conditions temporarily
limit system performance. This most often
occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system
may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on
windshield and fog on the inside of glass. In
these cases, the instrument cluster display will
read “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” and the system will have
degraded performance.
This message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in adverse weather conditions. The
ACC/FCW system will recover after the vehicle
has left these areas. Under rare conditions,
when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or
objects in its path this warning may temporarily
occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the windshield and the camera
located on the back side of the inside rearview
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited
functionality is no longer present, the system
will return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without any
snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the
windshield and forward facing camera
inspected at an authorized dealer.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster display reads “ACC/FCW Unavailable
Service Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable
Service Required”, there may be an internal
system fault or a temporary malfunction that
limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, ACC will
be temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try
activating ACC again later, following an ignition
cycle. If the problem persists, see an authorized
dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may
brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to
stay alert and may need to intervene. The
following are examples of these types of
situations:
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not recommended when
using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane
that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a
vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may
not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
The offset vehicle may move in and out of the
line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
STARTING AND OPERATING 139
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may decrease the vehicle speed and
acceleration for stability reasons, with no
vehicle in front detected. Once the vehicle is out
of the curve the system will resume your original
set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a
vehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed,
vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be
limited.
ACC Hill Example
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is
completely in the lane in which you are
traveling. In the lane changing example below,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing
lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's
too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC
may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in
the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to
the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
4
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 STARTING AND OPERATING
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer
edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not
detected until they have moved fully into the
lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and
stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not
react in situations where the vehicle you are
following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead
is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and
ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides
visual and audible indications of the distance
between the rear, and if equipped, the front
fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle when
backing up or moving forward (e.g. during a
parking maneuver). The vehicle brakes may be
automatically applied and released when
performing a reverse parking maneuver if the
system detects a possible collision with an
obstacle.
NOTE:
The driver can disable the automatic braking
function by turning ParkSense off via the
ParkSense switch. The driver can also over-
ride automatic braking by changing the gear
or by pressing the gas pedal over 90% of its
capacity during the braking event.
Automatic brakes are not available if the
vehicle is in 4WD Low.
Automatic brakes will not be available if there
is a faulted condition detected with the Park-
Sense Park Assist system or the Braking
System Module.
The automatic braking function may only be
applied if the vehicle deceleration is not
enough to avoid colliding with a detected
obstacle.
The automatic braking function may not be
applied fast enough for obstacles that move
toward the rear of the vehicle from the left
and/or right sides.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
STARTING AND OPERATING 141
The automatic braking function can be
enabled/disabled from the Customer
Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect system.
ParkSense will retain its last known configu-
ration state for the automatic braking func-
tion through ignition cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to
assist the driver in avoiding possible collisions
with detected obstacles when backing up in
REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
The system is designed to assist the driver
and not to substitute the driver.
The driver must stay in full control of the
vehicle's acceleration and braking and is
responsible for the vehicle's movements.
For limitations of this system and
recommendations see Ú page 145.
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense
is enabled at one of these gear selector
positions, the system will remain active until
the vehicle speed is increased to
approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. The
system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h). A display
warning will appear in the instrument cluster
display if the vehicle is in REVERSE and the
speed exceeds 7 mph (11 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The six ParkSense sensors (four when vehicle is
not equipped with front sensors), located in the
rear fascia/bumper, and the six ParkSense
sensors located in the front fascia/bumper,
monitor the area in front and behind the vehicle
that is within the sensors’ field of view. The front
sensors detect obstacles from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120 cm)
from the front fascia/bumper. The rear sensors
can detect obstacles from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm)
from the rear fascia/bumper. These distances
depend on the location, type and orientation of
the obstacle in the horizontal direction.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the
system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE
or when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle
has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in the left and/or right front
or rear regions based on the object’s distance
and location relative to the vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right
rear region, the display will show a single arc in
the left and/or right rear region and the system
will produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer
to the object, the display will show the single arc
moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow,
to fast, to continuous.
4
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front/Rear ParkSense Arcs
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
STARTING AND OPERATING 143
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument cluster display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows
the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2
Second Tone
Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than 47 inches
(120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime None None None Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No No No Yes Yes
4
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audio
tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist
audible alert (chime) after approximately three
seconds when an obstacle has been detected,
the vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is
applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be
selected from the Uconnect system
Ú page 172.
The chime volume settings include low,
medium, and high.
ParkSense will retain its last known
configuration state through ignition cycles.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if Sound and Display is selected from
the Customer Programmable Features section
of the Uconnect system Ú page 172.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display
Ú
page 86. It
provides visual warnings to indicate the distance
between the rear fascia/bumper and/or front
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense switch.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed
to disable the system, the instrument
cluster will display the “PARKSENSE
OFF” message for approximately five
seconds. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the
instrument cluster display will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
NOTE:
When ParkSense is disabled and the gear
selector is moved to the DRIVE position, no
warning message will be displayed.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense switch LED will be off when the
system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is
pushed, and the system requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily,
and then the LED will be on.
OPERATION WITH A TRAILER
For vehicles equipped with an Integrated Trailer
Brake Module (ITBM), the operation of the rear
sensors is automatically deactivated when the
trailer's electric plug is inserted in the vehicle's
tow hook socket. The front system is still
functional, and the arcs will be overlaid with a
“Trailer” message. The rear sensors are
automatically reactivated when the trailer's
cable plug is removed.
When the vehicle is connected to a trailer, the
instrument cluster display will show the "Rear
ParkSense Unavailable Trailer Connected"
message in the following situations:
For five seconds at vehicle start up
For five seconds when the ParkSense button
is pushed, as long as an object is not
detected in the front
As long as the vehicle is in REVERSE (vehicle
graphic displayed with a trailer overlay)
NOTE:
For more information on the Integrated Trailer
Brake Module, see Ú page 160.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
STARTING AND OPERATING 145
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense
System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime,
once per ignition cycle, and it will display the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS", or the "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message
for five seconds. When the gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument
cluster display will display a "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS",
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED" pop up message for five
seconds. After five seconds, a vehicle graphic
will be displayed with "UNAVAILABLE" at either
the front or rear sensor location depending on
where the fault is detected. The system will
continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is
functioning properly. These arc alerts will
interrupt the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" messages if
an object is detected within the five second
pop-up duration. The vehicle graphic will remain
displayed for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instrument
cluster display make sure the outer surface and
the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or
front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to
appear see an authorized dealer.
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" message appears in the instrument
cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car
wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or
hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear bumper are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep
the ParkSense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations
could affect the performance of ParkSense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF.”
Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
remains off until you turn it on again, even if
you cycle the ignition.
When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned
off, the instrument cluster will display “PARK-
SENSE OFF” for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume
of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
4
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 STARTING AND OPERATING
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do
so can result in the system not working prop-
erly. The ParkSense system might not detect
an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication
that an obstacle is behind or in front of the
fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the Park-
Sense system off if objects such as bicycle
carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within
12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message
to be displayed in the instrument cluster.
ParkSense should be disabled when the lift-
gate is in the open position. An opened lift-
gate could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LANESENSE OPERATION
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds
above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h). The LaneSense system uses a
forward looking camera to detect lane markings
and measure vehicle position within the lane
boundaries.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer
to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the loudspeaker sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle,
including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or
below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
STARTING AND OPERATING 147
When both lane markings are detected and the
driver drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a
haptic warning in the form of torque applied to
the steering wheel to prompt the driver to
remain within the lane boundaries. If the driver
continues to drift out of the lane, the LaneSense
system provides a visual warning through the
instrument cluster display to prompt the driver
to remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic
warning by applying force into the steering
wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected
and the driver drifts across the lane marking (no
turn signal applied), the LaneSense system
provides visual warnings through the
instrument cluster display to prompt the driver
to remain within the lane. When only a single
lane marking is detected, a haptic or a torque
warning will not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s
hands are on the steering wheel and provide an
audible warning to the driver if removed. The
system will cancel if the driver does not return
their hands to the wheel.
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR OFF
The LaneSense button is located on
the switch panel below the Uconnect
display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the
LaneSense button (LED turns off). A
“LaneSense On” message is shown in the
instrument cluster display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
LaneSense button once (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last
system state on or off from the last ignition
cycle when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE
The LaneSense system will indicate the current
lane drift condition through the instrument
cluster display.
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries
have not been detected and the LaneSense
telltale is solid white.
System On (Gray Lines) With White Telltale
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane-
Sense telltale is solid white when only the
left lane marking has been detected and the
system is ready to provide visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs.
4
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the left lane line flashes yellow
(on/off), and the LaneSense telltale
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Line With
Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only
the right lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines turn from gray to white to indicate that
both of the lane markings have been
detected. The LaneSense telltale is solid
green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is on to provide
visual warnings in the instrument cluster
display and a torque warning in the steering
wheel if an unintentional lane departure
occurs.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines) With Green Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses a lane
drift situation, the left lane line will turn solid
yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes
from solid green to solid yellow. At this time
torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Line With Solid Yellow
Telltale)
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
STARTING AND OPERATING 149
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the left lane line flashes yellow
(on/off). The LaneSense telltale changes
from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this
time torque is applied to the steering wheel in
the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Line With Flashing
Yellow Telltale)
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
CHANGING LANESENSE STATUS
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust
the intensity of the torque warning and the
warning zone sensitivity (early/late) that you
can configure through the Uconnect system
Ú page 172.
NOTE:
When enabled the system operates above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h).
The warnings are disabled with use of the
turn signal.
The system will not apply torque to the
steering wheel whenever a safety system
engages (Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control
System, Electronic Stability Control, Forward
Collision Warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an
on-screen image of the rear surroundings of
your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put
into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on
the Navigation/Multimedia radio display screen
along with a caution note to “Check Entire
Surroundings” across the top of the screen.
After five seconds this note will disappear. The
ParkView camera is located on the rear of the
vehicle above the rear license plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned off), the rear camera
mode is exited and the previous screen
appears.
Manual Activation Of The Backup Camera
1. Press the “Vehicle Menu” button located at
the bottom of the Uconnect display. Then
select the “Controls” tab.
2. Press the “Rear View Camera” button to
turn the Rear View Camera system on.
4
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has
programmable modes of operation that may be
selected through the Uconnect system
Ú page 172. In certain radio configurations,
these modes of operation will be found in the
“Camera” section of the vehicle settings menu.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned off), the rear camera
mode is exited and the previous screen
appears. When the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE (with camera delay turned on), the
camera image will continue to be displayed for
up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE
unless the following conditions occur: the
vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
vehicle is shifted into PARK, the vehicle’s
ignition is placed in the OFF position, or the
touchscreen button “X” to disable the display of
the Rear View Camera is pressed.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle
and its projected backup path based on the
steering wheel position. A dashed center line
overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to
assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/
receiver. Different colored zones indicate the
distance to the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do
not cover the lens.
Rear View Camera — Viewing At Speed
When the vehicle is in PARK,
NEUTRAL or DRIVE, the Rear View
Camera can be activated with the
“Rear View Camera” button in the
“Controls” tab of the “Vehicle Menu”. This
feature allows the customer to monitor the area
directly behind the vehicle (or trailer, if
Zone
Distance To The Rear
Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow
1 ft - 6.5 ft
(30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind
spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using ParkView to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is
seen. It is recommended that the driver
look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
STARTING AND OPERATING 151
equipped) for up to 10 seconds while driving. If
the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will be
displayed continuously until deactivated via the
“X” button on the touchscreen.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
1. Open the fuel filler door by pushing on the
outer edge of the fuel door.
NOTE:
There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors
inside the pipe seals the system.
2. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe
– the nozzle opens and holds the flapper
doors while refueling.
Fuel Filler
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is
full.
4. Wait five seconds before removing the fuel
nozzle to allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
5. Remove the nozzle and push the fuel door
all the way in to secure it in place.
VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a
certification label affixed to the driver's side
door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of
manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), front and rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR), and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH)
number is included on this label and indicates
the Month, Day and Hour of manufacture. The
bar code that appears on the bottom of the
label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,
options and cargo. The label also specifies
maximum capacities of front and rear (GAWR).
Total load must be limited so GVWR and front
and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
fuel containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
4
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 STARTING AND OPERATING
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the
allowable load weight a truck can carry,
including the weight of the driver, all
passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on
the front and rear axles. The load must be
distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR
of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the
components in the system with the lowest load
carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels).
Heavier axles or suspension components
sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability does not necessarily
increase the vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the
total weight of the vehicle with all fluids,
including vehicle fuel, at full capacity
conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
weight values are determined by weighing your
vehicle on a commercial scale before any
occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the
front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can
best be determined by weighing it when it is
loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has
not been exceeded. The weight on the front and
rear of the vehicle should then be determined
separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle.
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR
of either the front or rear axles has been
exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate
until the specified weight limitations are met.
Store the heavier items down low and be sure
that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all
loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an
adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers
and handles and the way the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you
can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before
towing a trailer, carefully review this information
to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If
you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it
can change the way your vehicle handles. This
could cause you to lose control. Also
overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
STARTING AND OPERATING 153
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions
will assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be
limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR
Ú page 151.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the
weight of all cargo, consumables and
equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in
or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for
operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to
put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in
combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do
not exceed either front or rear GAWR
Ú page 151.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height
multiplied by the maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link
that can be installed between the hitch receiver
and the trailer tongue that typically provides
adjustable friction associated with the
telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted
trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a
swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine
power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer
tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located
at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of
the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are commonly
used to tow small and medium sized trailers.
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)
or more, it is recommended to use a
weight-distributing hitch to ensure stable
handling of your vehicle. If you use a standard
weight-carrying hitch, you could lose control of
your vehicle and cause a collision.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
4
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute
trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front
axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer's directions,
it provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control thereby
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a
friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer
stability. Trailer Sway Control (TSC) and a weight
distributing (load equalizing) hitch are
recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW)
and may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
Recommended Distribution Hitch Adjustment
1. Measure the height of the top of the front
wheel opening on the fender to ground;
this is height H1.
Measuring Height (H)
2. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the
weight distribution bars connected.
3. Measure the height of the top of the front
wheel opening on the fender to ground; this
is height H2.
4. Install and adjust the tension in the weight
distributing bars per the manufacturers’
recommendations so that the height of the
front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/
2+H1 (about 1/2 the difference between
H2 and H1 above normal ride height [H1]).
5. The vehicle can now be driven.
NOTE:
For all towing conditions, we recommend towing
with tow haul mode engaged (if equipped).
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing
Hitch system may reduce handling,
stability, braking performance, and could
result in a collision.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be
compatible with Surge Brake Couplers.
Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac-
turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle
dealer for additional information.
WARNING! (Continued)
Measurement
Example
Example Height
(mm)
H1 925
H2 946
H2-H1 21
(H2-H1)/2 10.5
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 935.5
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
STARTING AND OPERATING 155
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you
in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,588 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lbs (2,721 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
For the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain see Ú page 156.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
4
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced
on the Tire and Loading Information placard Ú page 311. The addition of passengers and cargo may require reducing trailer tongue load and Gross
Trailer Weight (GTW).
Engine
GCWR (Gross
Combined Wt.
Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer Tongue Wt. (See Note)
3.6L - RWD Light Duty Cooling
8,900 lbs
(4,037 kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
3,500 lbs
(1,588 kg)
350 lbs (159 kg)
3.6L - RWD
11,600 lbs
(5,262 kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
6,200 lbs
(2,812 kg)
620 lbs (281 kg)
3.6L - AWD Light Duty Cooling
8,900 lbs
(4,037 kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
3,500 lbs
(1,588 kg)
350 lbs (159 kg)
3.6L - AWD
11,600 lbs
(5,262 kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
6,200 lbs
(2,812 kg)
620 lbs (281 kg)
5.7L - RWD
13,100 lbs
(5,942 kg)
60 sq ft (5.57 sq m)
7,400 lbs
(3,357 kg)
740 lbs (336 kg)
5.7L - AWD
13,100 lbs
(5,942 kg)
60 sq ft (5.57 sq m)
7,200 lbs
(3,266 kg)
720 lbs (327 kg)
5.7L - AWD R/T Tow N Go
14,600 lbs
(6,622 kg)
60 sq ft (5.57 sq m)
8,700 lbs
(3,946 kg)
870 lbs (395 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
STARTING AND OPERATING 157
TRAILER HITCH RECEIVER COVER
R
EMOVAL — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer
hitch receiver cover, this must be removed to
access the trailer hitch receiver (if equipped).
This cover is located at the bottom center of the
rear fascia/bumper.
1. Turn the two locking retainers located at
the bottom of the hitch receiver cover a
quarter turn counterclockwise and pull
bottom of the hitch receiver cover outward
(towards you).
Hitch Receiver Cover
2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward
(towards you) then downwards to disengage
the tabs located at the top of the hitch
receiver cover to remove.
Hitch Receiver Cover
To reinstall the cover after towing, repeat the
procedure in reverse order.
NOTE:
Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch receiver
cover in the bumper fascia prior to installation.
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
1 — Hitch Receiver Cover
2 — Locking Retainers
CAUTION!
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in the
front of the trailer. This places 10% of the GTW on
the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over
the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the
trailer to sway severely side to side which will
cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the
cause of many trailer collisions.
4
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
Consider the following items when computing
the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or
equipment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also,
additional factory-installed options or
dealer-installed options must be considered as
part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to
the Tire And Loading Information placard for the
maximum combined weight of occupants and
cargo for your vehicle Ú page 316.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of the new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in Scheduled
Servicing Ú page 279. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is
driven. The engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km)
that a trailer is towed, do not drive over
50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This helps the engine and
other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in
the trailer and will not shift during travel.
When trailering cargo that is not fully
secured, dynamic load shifts can occur
that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your
vehicle and have a collision.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do
not overload your vehicle or trailer. Over-
loading can cause a loss of control, poor
performance or damage to brakes, axle,
engine, transmission, steering, suspension,
chassis structure or tires.
Safety chains must always be used
between your vehicle and trailer. Always
connect the chains to the hook retainers of
the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under
the trailer tongue and allow enough slack
for turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked
on a grade. When parking, apply the
parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the
tow vehicle transmission in PARK (P). For
four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL (N). Always,
block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
STARTING AND OPERATING 159
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h)
when towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential
to the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR
and GAWR limits.
For further information Ú page 311.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake
system or vacuum system of your vehicle
with that of the trailer. This could cause inad-
equate braking and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer
with electronically actuated brakes. When
towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic
surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for
trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between
the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer
hitch utilized.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your
vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can over-
load your brake system and cause it to fail.
You might not have brakes when you need
them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stop-
ping distance. When towing, you should
allow for additional space between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
Failure to do so could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs
(453 kg) loaded, it should have its own
brakes and they should be of adequate
capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake
pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
4
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 STARTING AND OPERATING
Integrated Trailer Brake Module — If
Equipped
Your vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer
Brake Module (ITBM) for Electric and Electric
Over Hydraulic (EOH) trailer brakes.
NOTE:
This module has been designed and verified
with electric trailer brakes and new electric over
hydraulic systems. Some previous EOH systems
may not be compatible with ITBM.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM)
The user interface consists of the following:
Manual Brake Control Lever
Slide the manual brake control lever to the left
to activate power to the trailer's electric brakes
independent of the tow vehicle's brakes. If the
manual brake control lever is activated while
the brake is also applied, the greater of the two
inputs determines the power sent to the trailer
brakes.
The trailer and the vehicle's brake lamps will
come on when either vehicle braking or manual
trailer brakes are applied.
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
This light indicates the trailer electrical
connection status.
If no electrical connection is detected after the
ignition is turned on, pushing the GAIN
adjustment button or sliding the manual brake
control lever will display the GAIN setting for 10
seconds and the “Trailer Brake Status Indicator
Light” will not be displayed.
If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM), the
“Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light” will flash.
GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-)
Pushing these buttons will adjust the brake
control power output to the trailer brakes in
0.5 increments. The GAIN setting can be
increased to a maximum of 10 or decreased to
a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking).
GAIN
The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake
control for the specific towing condition and
should be changed as towing conditions
change. Changes to towing conditions include
trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions and
weather.
Adjusting GAIN
NOTE:
This should only be performed in a traffic free
environment at speeds of approximately
20–25 mph (30–40 km/h).
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good
working condition, functioning normally
and properly adjusted. See a trailer dealer
if necessary.
1 — GAIN Adjustment Button
2 — GAIN Adjustment Button
3 — Manual Brake Control Lever
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
STARTING AND OPERATING 161
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical
connections according to the trailer
manufacturer's instructions.
3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is
plugged in, the trailer connected message
should appear in the instrument cluster
display (if the connection is not recognized
by the ITBM, braking functions will not be
available), the GAIN setting will illuminate
and the correct type of trailer must be
selected from the instrument cluster display
options.
4. Push the UP or DOWN button on the
steering wheel until “TRAILER TOW”
appears on the screen.
5. Push the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel
to enter “TRAILER TOW”.
6. Push the UP or DOWN buttons until the
Trailer Brake Type appears on the screen.
7. Push the RIGHT arrow and then push the UP
or DOWN buttons until the proper Trailer
Brake Type appears on the screen.
8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer
on a dry, level surface at a speed of
20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and squeeze
the manual brake control lever completely.
9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by
squealing tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if
the trailer wheels turn freely, increase the
GAIN setting.
Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at
a point just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing
a heavier trailer, trailer wheel lockup may not be
attainable even with the maximum GAIN setting
of 10.
Display Messages
The trailer brake control interacts with the
instrument cluster display. Display messages,
along with a single chime, will be displayed
when a malfunction is determined in the trailer
connection, trailer brake control, or on the
trailer Ú page 86.
NOTE:
An aftermarket controller may be available
for use with trailers with air or electric over
hydraulic trailer brake systems. To determine
the type of brakes on your trailer and the
availability of controllers, check with your
trailer manufacturer or dealer.
Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it
may cause damage to the electrical system
and electronic modules of the vehicle. See an
authorized dealer if an aftermarket module is
to be installed.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever pulling a trailer, regardless of the
trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the
trailer are required for motoring safety.
WARNING!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with
the ITBM system may result in reduced or
complete loss of trailer braking. There may be
an increase in stopping distance or trailer
instability which could result in personal injury.
CAUTION!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible
with the ITBM system may result in reduced
or complete loss of trailer braking. There may
be an increase in stopping distance or trailer
instability which could result in damage to
your vehicle, trailer, or other property.
4
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 STARTING AND OPERATING
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory
approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to
the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a
trailer connector. Refer to the following
illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
connect) into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Battery
2 — Backup Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn
4 — Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
STARTING AND OPERATING 163
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away
from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE (D) range when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you
can use the AutoStick shift control to manually
select a lower gear.
If equipped with Tow N Go, it is recommended to
place the vehicle in tow mode by pushing the
TOW button.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions, will improve
performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
This action will also provide better engine
braking.
AutoStick
When using the AutoStick shift control, select
the highest gear that allows for adequate
performance and avoids frequent down-
shifts. For example, choose “5” if the desired
speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or “3”
if needed to maintain the desired speed.
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid
continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce
vehicle speed as necessary to avoid
extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and
road conditions allow.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy
loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experi-
ence speed drops greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), disengage until you can get back
to cruising speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with
light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
4
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow
applicable state and provincial laws. Contact
state and provincial Highway Safety offices
for additional details.
A flat tow electric power steering enable kit is
available for increased flat tow performance,
contact an authorized dealer for further
details.
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
R
EAR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive
models) is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are
OFF the ground. This may be accomplished
using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow
dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Shift the
transmission into PARK.
4. Turn the ignition OFF.
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF
The Ground
Rear-Wheel
Drive Models
All-Wheel Drive Models With
Single-Speed Transfer Case
All-Wheel Drive Models With
Two-Speed Transfer Case
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions:
Transmission In PARK
Transfer Case In NEUTRAL (N)
Tow In Forward Direction
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK OK
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
STARTING AND OPERATING 165
(Continued)
5. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly,
following the dolly manufacturer’s
instructions.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed
for towing, to secure the front wheels in the
straight position.
RECREATIONAL TOWING — ALL WHEEL
D
RIVE MODELS (SINGLE-SPEED
T
RANSFER CASE)
Recreational towing is not allowed. These
models do not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in
the transfer case.
NOTE:
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or
vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF
the ground.
RECREATIONAL TOWING — ALL-WHEEL
D
RIVE MODELS (TWO-SPEED TRANSFER
C
ASE)
The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL
(N) and the transmission must be in PARK for
recreational towing. The NEUTRAL (N) selection
button is adjacent to the transfer case selector
switch. Shifts into and out of transfer case
NEUTRAL (N) can take place with the selector
switch in any mode position.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT dolly tow any AWD vehicle. Towing
with only one set of wheels on the ground
(front or rear) will cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage. Tow
with all four wheels either ON the ground, or
OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
Tow only in the forward direction. Towing
this vehicle backwards can cause severe
damage to the transfer case.
The transmission must be in PARK for
recreational towing.
Before recreational towing, be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N)
Ú page 166. Otherwise, internal damage
will result.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on
tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face
bar will be damaged.
CAUTION! (Continued)
4
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for recreational towing.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on
level ground, with the engine running.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
Steps 1 through 3 are requirements that
must be met before pushing the NEUTRAL (N)
button, and must continue to be met until the
shift has been completed. If any of these
requirements are not met before pushing the
NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met
during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator
light will flash continuously until all require-
ments are met or until the NEUTRAL (N)
button is released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for
a shift to take place and for the position indi-
cator lights to be operable. If the ignition is
not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift will not
take place and no position indicator lights will
be on or flashing.
A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator
light indicates that shift requirements have
not been met.
4. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push
and hold the recessed transfer case
NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector
switch) for four seconds. The light behind
the N symbol will blink, indicating shift in
progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on
solid) when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is
complete. A “FOUR WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM
IN NEUTRAL” message will appear in the
instrument cluster.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
5. After the shift is completed and the
NEUTRAL (N) light stays on, release the
NEUTRAL (N) button.
6. Shift the transmission into REVERSE or
DRIVE.
7. Release the brake pedal for five seconds
and ensure that there is no vehicle
movement.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both
the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when
the driver is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in
NEUTRAL (N) before recreational towing to
prevent damage to internal parts.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
STARTING AND OPERATING 167
8. Press and hold the brake pedal. Shift the
transmission back into NEUTRAL.
9. Firmly apply the parking brake.
10. With the transmission and transfer case in
NEUTRAL, push and hold the ENGINE
START/STOP button until the engine turns
off.
11. Place the transmission gear selector in
PARK. Release the brake pedal.
12. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice
(without pressing the brake pedal) to turn
the ignition to the OFF mode.
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a
suitable tow bar.
14. Release the parking brake.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop,
leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that
must be met before pushing the NEUTRAL (N)
button, and must continue to be met until the
shift has been completed. If any of these
requirements are not met before pushing the
NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met
during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator
light will flash continuously until all require-
ments are met or until the NEUTRAL (N)
button is released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for
a shift to take place and for the position indi-
cator lights to be operable. If the ignition is
not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift will not
take place and no position indicator lights will
be on or flashing.
A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator
light indicates that shift requirements have
not been met.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push
and hold the recessed transfer case
NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector
switch) for one second.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
transmission is shifted into PARK with the
transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) and the engine
running. With the transfer case in NEUTRAL
(N) ensure that the engine is OFF before
shifting the transmission into PARK.
4
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 STARTING AND OPERATING
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns
off, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been
released, the transfer case will shift to the
position indicated by the selector switch.
9. Shift the transmission into PARK and turn
the engine off.
10. Release the brake pedal.
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
12. Start the engine.
13. Press and hold the brake pedal.
14. Release the parking brake.
15. Shift the transmission into REVERSE or
DRIVE, release the brake pedal, and check
that the vehicle operates normally.
DRIVING TIPS
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance
and a narrower track to make them capable of
performing in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Specific design characteristics
give them a higher center of gravity than
conventional passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is
a better view of the road, allowing you to
anticipate problems. They are not designed for
cornering at the same speeds as conventional
passenger cars any more than sports cars are
designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road
conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control or vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
When To Use 4WD Low — If Equipped
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD Low for
additional traction. This range should be limited
to extreme situations such as deep snow, mud,
or sand where additional low speed pulling
power is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of
25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in
4WD Low.
WARNING!
Do not drive in 4WD Low on dry pavement;
driveline damage may result. 4WD Low locks
front and rear drivelines together and does
not allow for differential action between the
front to rear driveshafts. Driving in 4WD Low
on pavement will cause driveline binding; use
only on wet or slippery surfaces.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
STARTING AND OPERATING 169
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving
through water, there are a number of
precautions that must be considered before
entering the water.
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your
vehicle. If you must drive through water, try to
determine the depth and the bottom condition
(and location of any obstacles) prior to entering.
Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in
deep water to minimize wave effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in
storm run-off), avoid crossing until the water
level recedes and/or the flow rate is reduced.
If you must cross flowing water avoid depths in
excess of 9 inches (23 cm). The flowing water
can erode the streambed, causing your vehicle
to sink into deeper water. Determine exit
point(s) that are downstream of your entry
point to allow for drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than
20 inches (51 cm), and reduce speed
appropriately to minimize wave effects.
Maximum speed in 20 inches (51 cm) of water
is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your
vehicle fluids and lubricants (engine oil,
transmission oil, axle, transfer case) to ensure
the fluids have not been contaminated.
Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in
appearance) should be flushed/changed as
soon as possible to prevent component
damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for
additional control at slower speeds, shift the
transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer
case to AWD Low if necessary Ú page 120. Only
shift into a lower gear to maintain forward
motion. Over-revving the engine can spin the
wheels and traction will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads,
because engine braking may cause skidding
and loss of control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE:
Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the
transmission to a lower gear and shift the
transfer case to AWD Low. Use FIRST gear and
AWD Low for very steep hills.
If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while
climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come
to a stop and immediately apply the brakes.
Restart the engine, and shift into REVERSE.
Back slowly down the hill, allowing the
compression braking of the engine to help
regulate the speed. If the brakes are required to
control vehicle speed, apply them lightly and
avoid locking or skidding the tires.
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed
5 mph (8 km/h). Always check water depth
before entering as a precaution, and check all
fluids afterward. Driving through water may
cause damage not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
4
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 STARTING AND OPERATING
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill;
always drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the
crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and
maintain forward motion by turning the front
wheels slowly. This may provide a fresh “bite”
into the surface and will usually provide traction
to complete the climb.
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the
transfer case into AWD Low. Let the vehicle go
slowly down the hill with all four wheels turning
against engine compression drag. This will
permit you to control the vehicle speed and
direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated
braking can cause brake fade with loss of
braking control. Avoid repeated heavy braking
by downshifting the transmission whenever
possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your
vehicle than does most on-road driving. After
going off-road, it is always a good idea to check
for damage. That way you can get any problems
taken care of right away and have your vehicle
ready when you need it.
Completely inspect the underbody of your
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,
suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and
clean as required.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness,
particularly on the chassis, drivetrain compo-
nents, steering, and suspension. Retighten
them, if required, and torque to the values
specified in the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush.
These things could be a fire hazard. They
might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses,
axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand,
water, or similar dirty conditions, have the
radiator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake
linings, and axle yokes inspected and
cleaned as soon as possible.
If you experience unusual vibration after
driving in mud, slush or similar conditions,
check the wheels for impacted material.
Impacted material can cause a wheel imbal-
ance and freeing the wheels of it will correct
the situation.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion,
or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or
grade, never attempt to turn around. To do so
may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle.
Always back carefully straight down a hill in
REVERSE gear. Never back down a hill in
NEUTRAL using only the brake.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes
may cause excessive wear or unpredictable
braking. You might not have full braking
power when you need it to prevent a collision.
If you have been operating your vehicle in
dirty conditions, get your brakes checked and
cleaned as necessary.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
171
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 4
With 8.4-inch Display or Uconnect 5/5 NAV With
10.1-inch Display systems, refer to your
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain
security features to reduce the risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle
systems and wireless communications. Vehicle
software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as
needed. Similar to a computer or other devices,
your vehicle may require software updates to
improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle
systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of
the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s
systems are breached. It may be possible
that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or
CD) into your vehicle if it came from a
trusted source. Media of unknown origin
could possibly contain malicious software,
and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems
to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your
nearest authorized dealer immediately.
5
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about
available Uconnect software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired
communications cannot be assured. Third
parties may unlawfully intercept information
and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Data
Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement or Ú page 104.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the
instrument panel. These buttons allow you to
access and change the customer
programmable features. Many features can
vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below
and/or beside the Uconnect system in the
center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on
the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll
through menus and change settings. Push the
center of the control knob one or more times to
select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen
Off and Mute buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to
turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button
again or tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a
Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
On the Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch
Display, push and hold the power button on the
radio’s faceplate to reset the radio.
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display Buttons On
Faceplate And Buttons On Touchscreen
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
MULTIMEDIA 173
For the Uconnect 4 With 8.4-inch Display
Press the Apps button, then press the Settings
button on the touchscreen to display the menu
setting screen. In this mode, the Uconnect
system allows you to access all of the available
programmable features.
NOTE:
Only one touchscreen area may be selected
at a time.
Depending on the vehicles options, feature
settings may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on
the touchscreen to enter the desired menu.
Once in the desired menu, press and release
the preferred setting option until a check mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Once the setting is
complete, either press the Back Arrow button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu, or press the X button on the touchscreen
to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the
Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down
through the available settings.
For the Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch
Display
Press the Vehicle button, then press the
Settings tab on the top of the touchscreen. In
this menu, the Uconnect system allows you to
access all of the available programmable
features.
NOTE:
Only one touchscreen area may be selected
at a time.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on
the touchscreen to enter the desired menu.
Once in the desired menu, press and release
the preferred setting option until a check mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Once the setting is
complete, press the Vehicle button to exit to the
screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button
on the right side of the screen will allow you to
toggle up or down through the available
settings.
5
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 MULTIMEDIA
Language
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system
will display in the chosen language. The available setting is:
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The
available languages are English, Français, and Español.
Setting Name Description
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the
system set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system
automatically adjust the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will
allow the user to adjust the brightness of the display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are
on. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+”
setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are
off. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+”
setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Keyboard
This setting will change the keyboard type on the display. The selectable
keyboards are “ABCDEF Keyboard”, “QWERTY Keyboard”, and “AZERTY
Keyboard”.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
MULTIMEDIA 175
Units
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will
display in the instrument cluster display and navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Control Screen Timeout
This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically
after five seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-Ups Displayed in Cluster
This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster
Display.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the
Instrument Cluster Display.
Ready To Drive Pop-Ups — If Equipped
This setting will enable the Ready To Drive Pop-Ups in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
Custom
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km),
“Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L),
“Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of
measurement independently.
5
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 MULTIMEDIA
Voice
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Clock
After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Description
Voice Response Length
This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition
system. The “Brief” setting provides a shortened audio description from
the system. The “Detailed” setting provides the full audio description
from the system.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the command list on or off. The “Always”
setting will always show the command list. The “With Help” setting will
show the command list and provide a brief description of what the
command does. The “Never” setting will turn the command list off.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS
This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The
system will control the time via the GPS location.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With
GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will
set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to
a 24-hour format.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
MULTIMEDIA 177
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Set Time Hours
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be
off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours.
The “-” setting will decrease the hours.
Set Time Minutes
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must
be off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the
minutes. The “-” setting will decrease the minutes.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera Delay This setting will add a timed delay to the rear backup camera when shifting out of reverse.
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the active backup camera guidelines on or off.
Setting Name Description
Automatic Emergency Braking —
If Equipped
This setting will take you to the selectable options for “Forward Collision Warning (FCW)” and “Forward Collision
Warning Sensitivity”.
Forward Collision Warning —
If Equipped
This setting will turn the Forward Collision system on or off. The “Off” setting will deactivate the FCW system.
The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning +
Active Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and apply some brake pressure when a collision is
detected.
5
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 MULTIMEDIA
Forward Collision Warning
Sensitivity — If Equipped
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning alert sounds. The “Medium”
setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected.
The “Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting
will have the FCW system signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
LaneSense Warning — If Equipped
This setting will change the distance at which the steering wheel will provide lane departure feedback. The
available settings are “Early”, “Medium”, and “Late”.
LaneSense Strength — If Equipped
This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback during a lane departure. The available
settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
ParkSense — If Equipped
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected and provide both an
audible chime and a visual display.
Front ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”,
and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”,
and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist —
If Equipped
This setting will turn the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off.
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off”
setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside
mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate both the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Electric Power Steering Default —
If Equipped
This setting will change the electric power setting to “Normal”, “Sport”, or “Comfort”.
Hill Start Assist — If Equipped This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
Setting Name Description
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
MULTIMEDIA 179
Mirrors & Wipers
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the
country of the vehicle purchased.
Setting Name Description
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
This setting will tilt the outside side-view mirrors when the ignition is in
the ON/RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position
when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. The available settings
are “On” and “Off”.
Auto Folding Side Mirrors
This setting will automatically fold and unfold the side-view mirrors when
the vehicle is turned on and off. The available settings are “On” and
“Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the rain sensing auto wipers on or off.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
5
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
The Auto Door Locks feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds
12 mph (20 km/h). The Auto Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer per written request of the customer. Please see
an authorized dealer for service.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the
headlights to shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The available
settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the
headlights to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings
are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Setting Name Description
Auto Unlock On Exit This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
MULTIMEDIA 181
Seats & Comfort — If Equipped
When Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote
start has been activated or the vehicle has been started.
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The “Off” setting will not sound
the horn when the Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is
pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are needed to unlock all the
doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All
Doors” setting will unlock all doors with only one push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry — If Equipped This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n Go) on or off.
Power Liftgate Alert — If Equipped
This setting will chime an audible alert when the power liftgate is raising or lowering. Selectable settings are
“On” and “Off”.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated
Seat & Heated Steering Wheel With
Vehicle Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats (if equipped) or heated steering wheel
(if equipped) when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting will not activate the
comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start.
The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
Easy Exit Seats
This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the engine is shut off. The available settings
are “On” and “Off”.
5
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 MULTIMEDIA
Key Off Options
When the Key Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings will only
activate when the ignition is set to OFF.
Trailer
When the Trailer button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to trailer towing.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seats
This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the engine is shut off. The available settings
are “On” and “Off”.
Key Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off. When any door is
opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on after the vehicle has been turned
off. The “+” will increase the amount of time. The “-” will decrease the amount of time.
Setting Name Description
Trailer Select
Select from “Trailer 1”, “Trailer 2”, “Trailer 3”, and“Trailer 4”. These trailer designations can be used to save
different trailer settings.
Trailer Brake Type
This setting will set the system to a specific trailer type. The available options are “Light Electric”, “Heavy
Electric”, “Light Electric-Over-Hydraulic”, and “Heavy Electric-Over-Hydraulic”.
Trailer Name
This setting will personalize the trailer name depending on the type of trailer you are hauling. Select the trailer
name from the following list: trailer, boat, car, cargo, dump, equipment, flatbed, gooseneck, horse, livestock,
motorcycle, snowmobile, travel, utility, and 5th wheel.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
MULTIMEDIA 183
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change
the audio location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
My Profile
When the My Profile button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s profiles.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/right of the vehicle. The
Speaker icon can be moved to set audio location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the volume will increase more as
the vehicle speeds up. The available settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX port. The available settings are
“+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The available languages are English, Français,
and Español.
Display Mode
This setting will adjust the display for the radio to “Auto” or “Manual”. “Manual” allows for more customization
with the radio display.
5
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 MULTIMEDIA
Display Brightness Headlights On
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this setting, Display
Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the
brightness.
Display Brightness Headlights Off
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this setting, Display
Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the
brightness.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
System Text Size This setting will allow you to change the text on the radio to “Standard”, “Large”, and “Taller”.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-Ups
Displayed in Cluster
This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Ready To Drive Pop-Ups —
If Equipped
This setting will enable the Ready To Drive Pop-Ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be “Off” for this setting to
be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to
a 24-hour format.
Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio with “Option 1” and “Option 2”.
Voice Barge-in This setting will allow voice barge-in to be turned on and off.
Show Command List This setting will allow the command list to be shown on and off.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-ups This setting will allow you to favorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
App Drawer Unfavoritings Pop-ups This setting will allow you to unfavorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
Setting Name Description
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
MULTIMEDIA 185
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
New Text Message Pop-ups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for new text messages. This setting options are “On” and
“Off”.
Missed Calls Message This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for missed calls. This setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Navigation Pop-ups This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for Navigation. This setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Key Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off. When any door is
opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated
Seat & Heated Steering Wheel With
Vehicle Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats (if equipped) or heated steering wheel
(if equipped) when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting will not activate the
comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start.
The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
Audio Settings This setting will take you to the audio settings for the vehicle profiles.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory default.
More Profile Options This setting will give access to more profile options.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Do Not Disturb
This setting will open the “Do Not Disturb” settings menu. The settings are “Auto Reply” (both, text, call), “Auto
Reply Message” (custom, default), and “Custom Auto Reply Message” (create message).
Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen.
5
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 MULTIMEDIA
Notifications
When the Notifications button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Notifications for the system.
Do Not Disturb All This setting will open the “Do Not Disturb All” settings menu. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Paired Phones This setting will show the list of paired phones.
Paired Audio Sources This setting will show the list of paired audio sources.
Enable Two Active Phones This setting will enable or disable two active phones with the vehicle. The setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Paired Phones And Audio Devices This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-ups This setting turns the “App Favorited” pop-up on or off.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Pop-ups This setting turns the “App Unfavorited” pop-up on or off.
New Text Message Pop-ups This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for new text messages of any connected phone on or off.
Missed Calls Message This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for missed calls of any connected phone on or off.
Navigation Pop-ups This setting turns receiving/storing predictive Navigation Pop-ups on or off.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
MULTIMEDIA 187
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can
be used to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
Accessibility — If Equipped
After pressing the Accessibility button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Setting Name Description
Tune Start
This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the 24
presets.
Channel Skip This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel list will display of the skipped channels.
Subscription Information This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information.
Setting Name Description
Accessibility
The “Accessibility” feature announces a function prior to performing the action selected when using DVD/
Blu-ray™ and USB Video functions, when it is activated. For example, when activated, and the Play button is
selected, the system will announce “Play button selected”, and then once pressed again the Play button will
perform its action.
5
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 MULTIMEDIA
Reset
When the Reset button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default
settings. These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
System Information — If Equipped
After pressing the System Information button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Setting Name Description
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Apps This setting will delete all installed apps on the vehicle.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory default.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data from the system, including
Bluetooth® devices and presets.
Setting Name Description
Software License When this feature is selected, a “Software License” screen will appear, displaying the system software version.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
MULTIMEDIA 189
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The Remote Sound System controls are located
on the rear surface of the steering wheel. Reach
behind the wheel to access the switches.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls (Back View Of
Steering Wheel)
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch
with a push button in the center and controls
the volume and mode of the sound system.
Pushing the top of the rocker switch increases
the volume, and pushing the bottom of the
rocker switch decreases the volume.
Pushing the center button makes the radio
switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.)
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with
a push button in the center. The function of the
left-hand control is different depending on
which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode.
RADIO OPERATION
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for
the next listenable station, and pushing the
bottom of the switch will “Seek” down for the
next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that
you have programmed in the radio preset
button.
MEDIA MODE
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the
next track on the selected media (AUX/USB/
Bluetooth®). Pushing the bottom of the switch
once goes to the beginning of the current track,
or to the beginning of the previous track if it is
within eight seconds after the current track
begins to play.
UCONNECT REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
(RSE) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System
plays your favorite CDs, DVDs or Blu-ray™ Discs.
You can also listen to audio over the wireless
headphones, or plug and play a variety of video
games or audio devices.
GETTING STARTED
Lift the LCD screen located in the rear of the
front seats.
RSE System Screen
5
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 MULTIMEDIA
Place the ignition in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tion.
If equipped with a Blu-ray™ disc player, the
icon will be present on the player.
Turn on the Rear Seat Entertainment system
by pushing the power button on the remote
control.
When the Video Screen(s) are open and a
DVD/Blu-ray™ disc is inserted into the disc
player, the screen(s) turn(s) on automatically,
the headphone transmitters turn on, and
playback begins.
RSE System Channel 1
With the Dual Video Screen system, Channel
1 on the remote control and headphones
refers to Screen 1 (driver's side), and
Channel 2 on the remote control and head-
phones refers to Screen 2 (passenger side).
The remote control and headphones channel
1 and 2 refer to screen 1 (driver’s side) and
screen 2 (passenger’s side).
The system can be controlled either by the
front seat occupants utilizing the touch-
screen radio or by the rear seat occupants
using the remote control.
RSE System Remote Control Channel Selectors
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
MULTIMEDIA 191
RSE System Headphone Channel Selectors
DUAL VIDEO SCREEN
NOTE:
Typically there are two different ways to operate
the features of the Rear Seat Entertainment
system:
The Remote Control
The Touchscreen Radio
PLAY A BLU-RAY™ DISC
The Blu-ray™ disc player is located in the center
console.
Blu-ray™ Disc Player Location
1. Insert the DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc with the label
facing as indicated on the DVD/Blu-ray™
Disc player. The radio automatically
selects the appropriate mode after the disc
is recognized and displays the menu
screen or starts playing the first track.
2. To watch a DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc on Channel 1
(driver’s side rear passenger), ensure the
Remote Control and Headphone channel
selector switches are on Channel 1.
3. To watch a DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc on Channel
2 (passenger’s side rear passenger),
ensure the Remote Control and
Headphone channel selector switches are
on Channel 2.
Using The Front Touchscreen Radio
Rear Media Control Screen
1. RSE Channel 1 Mode
Indicates the current source for Screen 1/
Channel 1. This button will be highlighted
when it is being controlled by the front user.
If this button is not highlighted, select the
button to access controls for Screen 1/
Channel 1 source.
2. RSE Power
Press to turn RSE On/Off.
5
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 MULTIMEDIA
3. RSE Mute
Mute rear headphones for the current igni-
tion cycle. Pressing mute again will unmute
rear headphones.
4. RSE Remote Control Lock-Out
Press to enable/disable remote control
functions.
5. RSE Channel 2 Mode
Indicates the current source for Screen 2/
Channel 2. This button will be highlighted
when it is being controlled by the front us-
er. If this button is not highlighted, press
the button to access controls for Screen 2/
Channel 2 source.
6. RSE Mode
Select this button to change the source for
the active (highlighted) rear Screen/Chan-
nel on the Rear Media Control screen.
7. Radio Full Screen Mode
Select this button to change to Full Screen
Mode.
8. Cabin Audio Mode
Press this button to change the cabin audio
to the rear entertainment source currently
shown on the Rear Media Control screen.
Press the Media button on the touchscreen,
and then press the Rear Media button on the
touchscreen.
Press the OK button on the touchscreen to
begin playing the Blu-ray™ disc.
Using The Remote Control
Select an audio channel (Channel 1 or
Channel 2), and then press the source key.
Using the Up and Down arrows, highlight
“Disc” from the menu and press the OK
button.
Press the pop-up/menu key to navigate the
disc menu and options.
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the SOURCE button on the Remote
Control.
2. While looking at Channel 1 or 2, highlight
“Disc” by either pushing Up/Down/Left/
Right buttons, then push ENTER/OK.
Select Disc Mode On The Rear Seat
Entertainment Screen
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Press the Media button on the Uconnect
system touchscreen.
2. Press the Rear Media button to display the
Rear Media Control Screen.
Rear Media Control Screen
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
MULTIMEDIA 193
3. Press the 1 or 2 button on the touchscreen,
then the Select Source button on the
touchscreen. Press the Disc button on the
touchscreen in the Media column. To exit,
press the X at the top right of the screen.
Rear Seat Entertainment Source Screen
NOTE:
Pressing the screen on the radio while a DVD or
Blu-ray™ Disc is playing brings up the basic
remote control functions for DVD play such as
scene selection, Play, Pause, FF, RW, and Stop.
Pressing the X in the upper corner will turn OFF
the remote control screen functions.
PLAY VIDEO GAMES
Connect the video game console to the Audio/
Video RCA/HDMI input jacks located on the side
of each seat.
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Jacks (AUX/HDMI Jacks)
on the side of each seat enable the monitor to
display video directly from a video camera,
connect video games for display on the screen, or
play music directly from an MP3 player.
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Input Jacks
When connecting an external source to the
AUX/HDMI input, be sure to follow the standard
color coding for the audio/video jacks:
1. Right audio in (red)
2. Left audio in (white)
3. Video in (yellow)
4. HDMI Input
NOTE:
Certain high-end video game consoles may
exceed the power limit of the vehicle's power
inverter.
IMPORTANT NOTES FOR DUAL VIDEO
S
CREEN SYSTEM
The Rear Seat Entertainment system is able
to transmit two channels of stereo audio and
video simultaneously.
The Blu-ray™ Disc Player can play CDs, DVDs,
and Blu-ray™ Discs.
Selecting a video source on Channel 1, the
video source will display on Channel 1 and
can be heard on Channel 1.
Selecting a video source on Channel 2, the
video source will display on Channel 2 and
can be heard on Channel 2.
Audio can be heard through the headphones
even when the screen(s) are closed.
5
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 MULTIMEDIA
BLU-RAY™ DISC PLAYER REMOTE
C
ONTROL
Blu-ray™ Player Remote Control
Controls And Indicators
1. — Turns the screen and wireless
headphone transmitter for the selected
Channel on or off. To hear audio while the
screen is closed, push the Power button to
turn the headphone transmitter on.
2. — Push to navigate menus.
3. OK — Push to select the highlighted option
in a menu.
4. — Push to navigate menus.
5. — Push to navigate menus.
6. BACK — Push to exit out of menus or return
to source selection screen.
7. — Mutes headphone audio.
8. — Push and hold to fast rewind through
the current audio track or video chapter.
9. — Stops disc play.
10. — Push to navigate chapters or titles.
11. — When a button is pushed, the current
channel or channel button is illuminated
momentarily.
12. SOURCE — Push to enter Source Selection
screen.
13. Channel/Screen Selector Switch — Indicates
which channel is being controlled by the
remote control. When the selector switch is in
the Channel 1 position, the remote controls
the functionality of headphone Channel 1
(left screen). When the selector switch is in
the Channel 2 position, the remote controls
the functionality of headphone Channel 2
(right screen).
14. — Push to navigate menus.
15. SETUP — Push to access the screen settings
menu.
16. — Push and hold to fast forward through
the current audio track or video chapter.
17. — Begin/resume or pause disc play.
18. Four Colored Buttons — Push to access
Blu-ray™ Disc features.
19. POPUP/MENU — Push to bring up repeat
and shuffle options, the Blu-ray™ Disc
pop-up menu, the DVD title menu, or to
access disc menus.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
MULTIMEDIA 195
HEADPHONES OPERATION
The headphones receive two separate channels
of audio using an infrared transmitter from the
video screen.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume
control, verify that the screen is turned on, the
channel is not muted, and the headphone
channel selector switch is on the desired
channel. If audio is still not heard, check that
the batteries are charged.
Rear Seat Entertainment Headphones
CONTROLS
The headphone power indicator and controls
are located on the right ear cup.
NOTE:
The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To
conserve battery life, the headphones will auto-
matically turn off approximately three minutes
after the rear video system is turned off.
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen
selector switch is in the same position as the
headphones selector switch.
NOTE:
When both the headphone and the remote
control channel selector switches are on
Channel 1, the Remote is controlling Channel
1 and the headphones are tuned to the audio
on Channel 1.
When both the headphone and the remote
control channel selector switches are on
Channel 2, the Remote is controlling Channel
2 and the headphones are tuned to the audio
on Channel 2.
2. Push the SOURCE button on the remote
control.
3. Pushing the SOURCE button will advance to
the next mode.
4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on
screen, use the cursor buttons on the
remote control to navigate to the available
modes and push the OK button to select the
new mode.
5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu,
push the BACK button on the remote
control.
REPLACING THE HEADPHONE
B
ATTERIES
Each set of headphones requires two AAA
batteries for operation. To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the left
ear cup of the headphones, and then slide
the battery cover downward.
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient
them according to the polarity diagram
shown.
3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
1 — Power Button
2 — Volume Control
3 — Channel Selection Switch
5
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 MULTIMEDIA
ACCESSIBILITY — IF EQUIPPED
Accessibility is a feature of the DVD/Blu-ray™
system that announces a function prior to
performing the action Ú page 172.
STEREO HEADPHONE LIFETIME LIMITED
W
ARRANTY
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty
covers the initial user or purchaser ("you" or
"your") of this particular Aptiv PLC (“Aptiv”)
wireless headphone ("Product"). The warranty is
not transferable.
How Long Does the Coverage Last? This
warranty lasts as long as you own the Product.
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as
specified below, this warranty covers any
Product that in normal use is defective in
workmanship or materials.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This
warranty does not cover any damage or defect
that results from misuse, abuse, or modification
of the Product other than by Aptiv. Foam
earpieces, which will wear over time through
normal use, are specifically not covered
(replacement foam is available for a nominal
charge). APTIV IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY
INJURIES OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR
PROPERTY RESULTING FROM THE USE OF, OR
ANY FAILURE OR DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT,
NOR IS APTIV LIABLE FOR ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR
OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE
WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions
may not allow the exclusion or limitation of
incidental or consequential damages, so the
above limitation may not apply to you. This
warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may
also have other rights, which vary from
jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
What Will Aptiv Do? Aptiv, at its option, will
repair or replace any defective Product. Aptiv
reserves the right to replace any discontinued
Product with a comparable model. THIS
WARRANTY IS THE SOLE WARRANTY FOR THIS
PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS,
AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES
(EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY
WARRANTY FOR MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
If you have any questions or comments
regarding your Aptiv wireless headphones,
please email hpser[email protected] or phone:
888-293-3332
System Information
Disc Menu
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc,
pushing the remote control’s POPUP/MENU
button displays a list of all commands which
control playback of the disc.
Display Settings
Video Screen Display Settings
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
MULTIMEDIA 197
When watching a video source (Blu-ray™ Disc or
DVD Video with the disc in Play mode, AUX
Video, etc.), pushing the remote control’s
SETUP button activates the Display Settings
menu. These settings control the appearance of
the video on the screen. The factory default
settings are already set for optimum viewing, so
there is no need to change these settings under
normal circumstances.
To change the settings, push the remote
control’s navigation buttons (?, ?) to select an
item, then push the remote control’s navigation
buttons (?, ?) to change the value for the
currently selected item. To reset all values back
to the original settings, select the Default
Settings menu option and push the remote
control’s ENTER/OK button.
Disc Features control the remote Blu-ray™ Disc
player's settings of DVD being watched in the
remote player.
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
To listen to only the audio portion of the channel
with the screen closed:
Set the audio to the desired source and
channel.
Close the video screen.
To change the current audio mode, push the
remote control’s SOURCE button. This will
automatically select the next available audio
mode without using the Mode/Source Select
menu.
When the screen is reopened, the video
screen will automatically turn back on and
show the appropriate display menu or media.
If the screen is closed and there is no audio
heard, verify that the headphones are turned on
(the ON indicator is illuminated) and the
headphone selector switch is on the desired
channel. If the headphones are turned on, push
the remote control’s power button to turn audio
on. If audio is still not heard, check that fully
charged batteries are installed in the
headphones.
Disc Formats
The Blu-ray™ Disc player is capable of playing
the following types of 4.7-inch (12 centimeter)
diameter discs:
BD: BDMV (Profile 1.1), BDAV (Profile 1.1)
DVD: DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, AVCREC,
AVCHD, DVD-VR
CD: CD-DA, VCD, CD-TEXT
DVD/CD: MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX (versions 3 –
6) profile 3.0
DVD Region Codes
The Blu-ray™ Disc player and many DVD discs
are coded by geographic region. These region
codes must match in order for the disc to play.
If the region code for the DVD disc does not
match the region code for the player, the disc
will not play.
DVD Audio Support
When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the
Blu-ray™ Disc player, the DVD-Audio title on the
disc is played by default (most DVD-Audio discs
also have a Video title, but the Video title is
ignored). All multichannel program material is
automatically mixed down to two channels,
which may result in a lowered apparent volume
level. If you increase the volume level to
account for this change in level, remember to
lower the volume before changing the disc or to
another mode.
5
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 MULTIMEDIA
Recorded Discs
The Blu-ray™ Disc player will play CD-R and
CD-RW discs recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD
format, or as a CD-ROM containing MP3 or WMA
files. The player will also play DVD-Video content
recorded to a DVD-R or DVD-RW disc. DVD-ROM
discs (either pressed or recorded) are not
supported.
If you record a disc using a personal computer,
there may be cases where the Blu-ray™ Disc
player may not be able to play some or the
entire disc, even if it is recorded in a compatible
format and is playable on other players. To help
avoid playback problems, use the following
guidelines when recording discs:
Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions
that are closed are playable.
For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple
CD-Audio sessions, the player will renumber the
tracks so each track number is unique.
For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use
the ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or
Romeo format. Other formats (such as UDF,
HFS, or others) are not supported.
The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files
and 99 folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
Mixed media recordable DVD formats will
only play the Video_TS portion of the disc.
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that
is playable in the Blu-ray™ Disc player, check
with the disc recording software publisher for
more information about burning playable discs.
The recommended method for labeling
recordable discs (CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is
with a permanent marker. Do not use adhesive
labels as they may separate from the disc,
become stuck, and cause permanent damage
to the DVD player.
Compressed Audio Files (MP3 and WMA)
The Blu-ray™ Disc player is capable of playing
MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3) and WMA
(Windows Media Audio) files from a CD Data
disc (usually a CD-R or CD-RW).
The Blu-ray™ Disc player always uses the file
extension to determine the audio format, so
MP3 files must always end with the extension
“.mp3” or “.MP3” and WMA files must always
end with the extension “.wma” or “.WMA”. To
prevent incorrect playback, do not use these
extensions for any other types of files.
For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data
(such as artist name, track title, album, etc.)
are supported.
Any file that is copy protected (such as those
downloaded from many online music stores)
will not play. The Blu-ray™ player will auto-
matically skip the file and begin playing the
next available file.
Other compression formats such as AAC,
MP3 Pro, Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not
play. The Blu-ray™ player will automatically
skip the file and begin playing the next avail-
able file.
If you are creating your own files, the recom-
mended fixed bit rate for MP3 files is
between 96 and 192 Kbps and the recom-
mended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates
are also supported. For both formats, the
recommended sample rate is either 44.1 kHz
or 48 kHz.
To change the current file, use the remote
control’s or Blu-ray™ Disc player’s ? button to
advance to the next file, or the ? button to
return to the start of the current or previous file.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
MULTIMEDIA 199
Disc Errors
If the Blu-ray™ Disc player is unable to read the
disc, a “Disc Error” message is displayed on the
rear screen and Radio displays. A dirty,
damaged, or incompatible disc format are all
potential causes for a “Disc Error” message.
If a disc has a damaged track which results in
audible or visible errors that persists for two
seconds, the Blu-ray™ Disc player will attempt
to continue playing the disc by skipping forward
one to three seconds at a time. If the end of the
disc is reached, the Blu-ray™ Disc player will
return to the beginning of the disc and attempt
to play the start of the first track.
The Blu-ray™ Disc player may shut down during
extremely hot conditions, such as when the
vehicle’s interior temperature is above 120°F
(48.9°C). When this occurs, the player will
display “High Temp” and will shut off the rear
seat displays until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect
the optics of the Blu-ray™ Disc player.
Product Agreement
This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by US patents and
other intellectual property rights. Use of this
copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for
home or other limited viewing uses otherwise
authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
Dolby Digital and MLP Lossless
Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories. "Dolby", "MLP
Lossless", and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential
unpublished works. Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby
Laboratories. All rights reserved.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone
being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or
noisy performance from your radio. This
condition may be lessened or eliminated by
relocating the mobile phone antenna. This
condition is not harmful to the radio. If your
radio performance does not satisfactorily
“clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is
recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation
when not using Uconnect (if equipped).
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal
wireless radio is far below the FCC and IC radio
frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the
wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the
human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the
use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
turning on the wireless radio Ú page 346.
5
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability
and brake performance under most braking
conditions. The system automatically prevents
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during
braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure
that the ABS is working properly each time the
vehicle is started and driven. During this
self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound
as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels are
beginning to lock. Road conditions such as ice,
snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when ABS activates:
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may
continue to hear for a short time after the
stop).
Brake pedal pulsations.
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of
the stop.
ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires.
Modification may result in degraded ABS
performance.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to inter-
ference caused by improperly installed or
high output radio transmitting equipment.
This interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by
qualified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will
diminish their effectiveness and may lead
to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping
distance longer. Just press firmly on your
brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle
too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
SAFETY 201
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning
and that service is required. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to
restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the
ABS Warning Light does not come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This
system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
Brake Assist System (BAS), Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation
(ERM), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Traction
Control System (TCS). These systems work
together to enhance both vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST), Rain Brake
Support (RBS), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), and
Trailer Sway Control (TSC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency
braking situation by sensing the rate and
amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS
complements the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results
in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the
stopping sequence (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake
pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the
brake system is not functioning properly and
that immediate service is required. If the Brake
System Warning Light does not come on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of
a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner,
which could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
6
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 SAFETY
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
DST is a feature of the ESC and Electric Power
Steering (EPS) modules that provides torque at
the steering wheel for certain driving conditions
in which the ESC module is detecting vehicle
instability. The torque that the steering wheel
receives is only meant to help the driver realize
optimal steering behavior in order to reach/
maintain vehicle stability. The only notification
the driver receives that the feature is active is
the torque applied to the steering wheel.
NOTE:
The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
realize the correct course of action through
small torques on the steering wheel, which
means the effectiveness of the DST feature is
highly dependent on the driver’s sensitivity and
overall reaction to the applied torque. It is very
important to realize that this feature will not
steer the vehicle, meaning the driver is still
responsible for steering the vehicle.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
EBD manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by
limiting braking pressure to the rear axle. This is
done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to
avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear
axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and
the speed of the vehicle. When Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM) determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and
vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially
cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM
can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving
maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to
other factors, such as road conditions, leaving
the roadway, or striking objects or other
vehicles.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability
of the vehicle under various driving conditions.
ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering
of the vehicle by applying the brake of the
appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the above
conditions. Engine power may also be reduced
to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence
the chance that wheel lift or rollover may
occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll
overs, especially those that involve leaving
the roadway or striking objects or other
vehicles. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
SAFETY 203
(Continued)
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
oversteer or understeer condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
located in the instrument cluster will start to
flash as soon as the ESC system becomes
active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light also flashes when the Traction
Control System (TCS) is active. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation,
the ESC system may have multiple operating
modes.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent accidents resulting from loss of
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver
input for the conditions. Only a safe, atten-
tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle,
and may negatively affect the performance
of the ESC system. Changes to the steering
system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely
affect ESC performance. Improperly
inflated and unevenly worn tires may also
degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC
system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 SAFETY
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system
will be in this mode. This mode should be used
for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC
modes should only be used for specific reasons
as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than normally allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily
push the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF
Indicator Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC
on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF button
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes,
the push and release of the button will toggle
the ESC modes. Multiple attempts may be
required to return to "ESC On" mode.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction
and the ESC system becomes active. The ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates
that the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) is in a reduced mode.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come
on momentarily each time the ignition placed
in the ON position.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS func-
tionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip
feature described in the TCS section), has
been disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator
Light will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the
ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
SAFETY 205
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON
position, the ESC system will be on even if it
was turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver
releases the brake while stopped on an incline,
HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for
a short period. If the driver does not apply the
throttle before this time expires, the system will
release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order
for HSA to activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in
forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in
REVERSE gear.
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all
forward gears. The system will not activate if
the transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For
vehicles equipped with a manual transmis-
sion, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will remain
active.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting see Ú page 172.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
back while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is
not a substitute for active driving involvement.
It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive to distance to other vehicles, people,
and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the
vehicle under all road conditions. Your
complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated
and deactivated with the brake switch. If
so, there may not be enough brake pres-
sure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer
on a hill when the brake pedal is released.
In order to avoid rolling down an incline
while resuming acceleration, manually acti-
vate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle
brake pressure prior to releasing the brake
pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply
the parking brake fully when exiting your
vehicle. Also, be certain to place the trans-
mission in PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision or serious personal injury.
6
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 SAFETY
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet
conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water
buildup on the front brake rotors. It functions
when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI
speed. When Rain Brake Support is active,
there is no notification to the driver and no
driver interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full
braking during emergency braking situations. It
anticipates when an emergency braking
situation may occur by monitoring how fast the
throttle is released by the driver. The Electronic
Brake Controller (EBC) will prepare the brake
system for a panic stop.
Traction Control System (TCS)
TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the
TCS may apply brake pressure to the spinning
wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power to provide
enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of
the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD),
functions similarly to a limited slip differential
and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle.
If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster
than the other, the system will apply the brake of
the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
power to be applied to the wheel that is not
spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS
and ESC are in reduced modes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
swaying. Always use caution when towing a
trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight
recommendations Ú page 152.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine
power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” mode.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
I
F EQUIPPED
BSM uses two radar sensors, located inside the
rear fascia/bumper, to detect highway
licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot
zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning
Light will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear
or REVERSE (R).
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
SAFETY 207
The BSM detection zone covers approximately
one lane in width, on both sides of the vehicle
12 ft (3.8 m). The zone length starts at the side
of the vehicle, near the B-pillar, and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear
fascia/bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system
monitors the detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle when the vehicle speed has reached
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and
will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT
change if your vehicle is towing a trailer.
Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is
clear for both your vehicle and trailer before
making a lane change. If the trailer or other
object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment)
extends beyond the side of your vehicle, this
may result in random false detections on the
trailer, and false chimes when the turn signal
is used Ú page 172.
The BSM system can become blocked if
snow, ice, mud, or other road contaminations
accumulate on the rear fascia/bumper
where the radar sensors are located. The
system may also detect blockage if the
vehicle is operated in areas with extremely
low radar returns such as a desert or parallel
to a large elevation drop. If blockage is
detected, a “Blind Spot Temporarily Unavail-
able, Wipe Rear Corners” message will
display in the cluster, both mirror lights will
illuminate, and BSM and RCP alerts will not
occur. This is normal operation. The system
will automatically recover and resume func-
tion when the condition clears. To minimize
system blockage, do not block the area of the
rear fascia/bumper where the radar sensors
are located with foreign objects (bumper
stickers, bicycle racks, etc.) and keep it clear
of road contaminations.
The area on the rear fascia/bumper where the
radar sensors are located must remain free of
snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination so that
the BSM system can function properly. Do not
block the area of the rear fascia/bumper where
the radar sensors are located with foreign
objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
Sensor Location (Left Side Shown)
6
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 SAFETY
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in
the detection zones by illuminating the BSM
warning light located in the outside mirrors. In
addition, when the turn signal is activated
during the alert on the side of the vehicle
corresponding to the alert, an audible (chime)
alert can be heard. During the audible (chime)
alert, the radio volume will be reduced
Ú page 210.
BSM Warning Light
The BSM system monitors the detection zone
from three different entry points (Side, Rear,
Front) while driving to see if an alert is
necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes
from either side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle
on either side and enter the rear detection zone
with a relative speed of less than 30 mph
(48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a
relative speed of less than 15 mph (24 km/h))
and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for
approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than
15 mph (24 km/h), the warning light will not
illuminate.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
SAFETY 209
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an
alert on stationary objects such as guardrails,
posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However,
occasionally the system may alert on such
objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
are traveling in the opposite direction of the
vehicle in adjacent lanes Ú page 346.
Opposing Traffic
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing
out of parking spaces where their vision of
oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space
until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The
RCP system will then have a clear view of the
cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is
detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), to
objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an
aid to help detect objects in the blind spot
zones. The BSM system is not designed to
detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
6
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 SAFETY
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE
(R), the driver is alerted using both the visual
and audible alarms, including reducing the
radio volume.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If
the sensors are blocked by other structures or
vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
driver.
Blind Spot Modes
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of
operation that are available in the Uconnect
system.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. However, when the system is
operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and
audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/
Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a
visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror
based on a detected object. If the turn signal is
then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn
signal and detected object are present on the
same side at the same time, both the visual and
audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the
audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever
an audible alert is requested, the radio is also
muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be
no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM
or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time
the vehicle is started the previously stored
mode will be recalled and used.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
W
ITH MITIGATION
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with
audible warnings, visual warnings (within the
instrument cluster display), and may apply a
brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings and
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path (RCP) Detection is not a
backup aid system. It is intended to be used
to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in
a parking lot situation. Drivers must be
careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
SAFETY 211
limited braking are intended to provide the
driver with enough time to react, avoid or
mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake
Controller (EBC) to calculate the probability of a
forward collision. When the system determines
that a forward collision is probable, the driver
will be provided with audible and visual warn-
ings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If
the driver does not take action based upon
these progressive warnings, then the system
will provide a limited level of active braking to
help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential
forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warn-
ings by braking and the system determines that
the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake
force, the system will compensate and provide
additional brake force as required.
If an FCW with Mitigation event begins at a
speed below 38 mph (62 km/h), the system
may provide the maximum or partial braking to
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the
Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
stops the vehicle completely, the system will
hold the vehicle at a standstill for two seconds
and then release the brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with
the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable,
the warning message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is
1 mph (2 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles such as guard rails or
sign posts based on the course prediction.
This is expected and is a part of normal FCW
activation and functionality.
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To
prevent such misuse of the system, after four
Active Braking events within an ignition cycle,
the Active Braking portion of FCW will be
deactivated until the next ignition cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
system should be deactivated to prevent
unnecessary warnings to the surroundings. If
the vehicle enters 4WD Low range, the FCW
system will be automatically deactivated
Ú page 346.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor
can FCW detect every type of potential
collision. The driver has the responsibility to
avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via
braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
6
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 SAFETY
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status
are programmable through the Uconnect
system Ú page 172.
The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium”
setting and the system status is “Warning &
Braking”. This allows the system to warn the
driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.
Changing the FCW status to the “Far” setting
allows the system to warn the driver of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front using
audible/visual warnings when the latter is at a
farther distance than the “Medium” setting.
This provides the most reaction time to avoid a
possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting
allows the system to warn the driver of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front when
the distance between the vehicle in the front is
much closer. This setting provides less reaction
time than the “Far” and “Medium” settings,
which allows for a more dynamic driving
experience.
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning”
prevents the system from providing limited
active braking, or additional brake support if
the driver is not braking adequately in the
event of a potential frontal collision, but
maintains the audible and visual warnings.
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents
the system from providing autonomous
braking, or additional brake support if the
driver is not braking adequately in the event
of a potential frontal collision.
The system will retain the last setting
selected by the driver after ignition shut
down.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such
as overhead objects, ground reflections,
objects not in the path of the vehicle,
stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the
same or higher rate of speed.
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the
unavailable screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
momentarily, there may be a condition that
limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, the active
braking may not be fully available. Once the
condition that limited the system performance
is no longer present, the system will return to its
full performance state. If the problem persists,
see an authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster displays:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
SAFETY 213
(Continued)
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure based on the vehicle recommended
cold tire pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The
tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is
driven — this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
See Ú page 311 on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low
pressure warning threshold for any reason,
including low temperature effects, or natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists,
and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at
or above recommended cold tire pressure.
Once the low tire pressure warning has been
illuminated, the tire pressure must be increased
to the recommended cold tire pressure in order
for the TPMS Warning Light to be turned off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
The system will automatically update and the
TPMS Warning Light will extinguish once the
updated tire pressures have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive
this information.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire
pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient
temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured
tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature
drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa).
This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to
turn on the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the
vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to
approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the TPMS
Warning Light will still be on. In this situation,
the TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after
the tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold tire pressure value.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the orig-
inal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
pressures and warnings have been estab-
lished for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or
sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. The TPMS
sensor is not designed for use on after-
market wheels and may contribute to a
poor overall system performance or sensor
damage. Customers are encouraged to use
OEM wheels to assure proper TPMS feature
operation.
6
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 SAFETY
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal
tire care and maintenance, or to provide
warning of a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pres-
sure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure using
an accurate tire gauge, even if underinflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumina-
tion of the TPMS Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect
tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the
actual tire pressure in the tire.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
uses wireless technology with wheel
rim-mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the Receiver Module.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to regularly
check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to
maintain the proper pressure Ú page 346.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
consists of the following components:
Receiver Module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
messages, which display in the instrument
cluster, and a graphic displaying tire pres-
sures
TPMS Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings
The TPMS Warning Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster,
and an audible chime will be
activated, when one or more of the
four active road tire pressures are low. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display an
"Inflate to XX" message and a graphic display of
the pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) in a
different color Ú page 86.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to
an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure, always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could
damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
SAFETY 215
NOTE:
Your system can be set to display pressure units
in PSI, BAR or kPa.
Low Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the
four active road tire(s), you should stop as soon
as possible, and inflate the low tire(s) that is in
a different color on the graphic display to the
vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
displayed in the “Inflate to XX” message.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
The system will automatically update, the
graphic display of the pressure value(s) will
return to its original color and the TPMS
Warning Light will extinguish once the updated
tire pressure(s) have been received. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this
information.
Service TPMS System Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds, and
remain on solid when a system fault is detected.
The system fault will also sound a chime. The
instrument cluster display will display a
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a
minimum of five seconds. This message is then
followed by a graphic display, with “--“ in place
of the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire
Pressure Monitoring sensor(s) is not being
received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If
the system fault no longer exists, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
no longer flash, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
message will not be present, and a pressure
value will be displayed instead of dashes. A
system fault can occur by any of the following:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same Radio
Frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors.
NOTE:
There is no TPMS sensor in the spare tire. The
TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pres-
sure. If you install the spare tire in place of a
road tire that has a pressure below the low-pres-
sure warning limit, upon the next ignition switch
cycle, the TPMS Warning Light will remain on, a
chime will sound, and the instrument cluster
display will still display a pressure value in the
different color graphic display and an “Inflate to
XX” message will be displayed. After driving the
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. In addition,
the instrument cluster display will display a
6
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 SAFETY
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for five
seconds and then display dashes (--) in place of
the pressure value. For each subsequent igni-
tion switch cycle, a chime will sound, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on solid, and the instrument cluster display will
display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for
five seconds and then display dashes (--) in
place of the pressure value. Once you repair or
replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on
the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the TPMS
will update automatically.
In addition, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off
and the graphic in the instrument cluster
display will display a new pressure value
instead of dashes (--), as long as no tire
pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit
in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS
to receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and
tire assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors,
such as when installing winter wheel and tire
assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring
(TPMS) sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on. The instrument cluster will display the
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then
display dashes (--) in place of the pressure
values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS
will no longer chime or display the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message in the instrument
cluster but dashes (--) will remain in place of the
pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
equipped with TPMS sensors. Then, drive the
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then turn off. The instrument
cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message and then display pressure values in
place of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle
the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no
longer be displayed as long as no system fault
exists.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air
Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your
passengers as safe as possible.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
SAFETY 217
(Continued)
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air
bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured
in the appropriate child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear
seating position Ú page 238.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint Ú page 238.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow
the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side air bags, and
deployment occurs, the side air bags will
inflate forcefully into the space between
occupants and the door and occupants
could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
be modified to accommodate a disabled
person, see Ú page 342 for customer
service contact information.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road
may be a poor driver and could cause a collision
that includes you. This can happen far away
from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives,
and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries
in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen
when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat
belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
belted at all times.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 SAFETY
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position,
a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the
driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
remain on until both outboard front seat belts
are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard
front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
(the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent
chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will remain on until the seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning
sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered
when an animal or other items are placed on
the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is
recommended that pets be restrained in the
rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet
carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until the driver and outboard
front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt
to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the
vehicle.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
SAFETY 219
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or
you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always
be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear
their seat belts whether or not an air bag is
also provided at their seating position to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death
in the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/
shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic
bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut into
you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against
your body, without twists. If you can’t
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it
to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
6
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 SAFETY
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of the front seat, and next to your arm in the
rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear
seat). Grab the latch plate and pull out the
seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the
seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect
you properly. In a sudden stop, you could
move too far forward, increasing the possi-
bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the
inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your
shoulder so that your strongest bones will
take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision.
You are more likely to hit your head in a
collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
WARNING! (Continued)
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in
a collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the
seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
SAFETY 221
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automat-
ically retract to its stowed position. If
necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as
possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter
the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt
is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger
seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the
seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze
the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that
serves you best.
Adjustable Upper Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower
position, and if you are taller than average, you
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher
position. After you release the anchorage button,
try to move it up or down to make sure that it is
locked in position.
6
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 SAFETY
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This
feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to
be adjusted in the upward position without
pushing or squeezing the release button. To
verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched,
pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly,
even when the webbing is fully extended and the
adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, an authorized
dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender.
The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the
existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different
occupant, it must be removed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of injury in
the event of an accident is reduced for the
mother and the unborn child if they are wearing
a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of
a collision. These devices may improve the
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much worse.
You might suffer internal injuries, or you
could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow
these instructions to wear your seat belt
safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will with-
draw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjust-
ments when the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physi-
cally required in order to properly fit the
original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the
Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the
distance between the front edge of the
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not
needed can increase the risk of serious
injury or death in a collision. Only use the
Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not
long enough and only use in the recom-
mended seating positions. Remove and
store the Seat Belt Extender when not
needed.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
SAFETY 223
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision.
Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat
belt still must be worn snugly and positioned
properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the
air bags, the pretensioners are single use items.
A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a collision. The seat belt system has a
retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is
used to secure a child restraint system
Ú page 249.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature
for each seating position.
Captain’s Chairs Second Row (6 Passenger) Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
60/40 Second Row (7 Passenger) Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
60/40 Second Row (5 Passenger) Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
6
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 SAFETY
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal usage,
only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound
as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing
necessary to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate
into the buckle until you hear a "click”.
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
child restraint is installed in a seating position
that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire seat belt is
extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disengage
the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function
is not working properly when checked
according to the procedures in the Service
Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in colli-
sions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the
seat belt or children who are using booster
seats. The locked mode is only used to
install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
SAFETY 225
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with the
electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
vehicle may be equipped with the following Air
Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position
or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on
and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply
system that may deploy the air bag system even
if the battery loses power or it becomes
disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately four to
eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition
switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn
off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part
of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect
the air bag system. The diagnostics also record
the nature of the malfunction. While the air bag
system is designed to be maintenance free, if any
of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the
ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled.
In this condition the air bags may not be ready to
inflate for your protection. Have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
6
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 SAFETY
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light is detected, which could affect
the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light will illuminate on the instrument panel.
The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay
on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
chime will sound to alert you that the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on
and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately
Ú page 95.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger.
The front air bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bag system to protect you in a
collision. If the light does not come on as a
bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag
deployment could cause serious injury,
including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
SAFETY 227
(Continued)
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has
multistage driver and front passenger air bags.
This system provides output appropriate to the
severity and type of collision as determined by
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag
deployment. A low energy output is used in less
severe collisions. A higher energy output is used
for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/
or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger
seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
front passenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags based upon seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front
passenger Occupant Classification System
(“OCS”) that is designed to provide Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to
the occupant’s seated weight input, as
determined by the OCS.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide
additional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce
the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for
example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near
the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a colli-
sion severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air
bag covers or attempt to open them manu-
ally. You may damage the air bags and you
could be injured because the air bags may
no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags
are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts
even though you have air bags.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 SAFETY
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good indicators
of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help keep
you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air
bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags
inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate
while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety
system for this vehicle. It is designed to provide
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output
appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight, as
determined by the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
consists of the following:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and
Sensor located in the front passenger seat
Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And
Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is
located underneath the front passenger seat.
The Sensor is located beneath the passenger
seat cushion foam. Any weight on the seat will
be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input
from the Sensor to determine the front
passenger’s most probable classification. The
OCM communicates this information to the
ORC. The ORC may reduce the inflation rate of
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
deployment based on occupant classification.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated
properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may
reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates that:
The front passenger seat is unoccupied or
has very light objects on it; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a
small passenger, including a child; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a
rear-facing child restraint; or
The front passenger is not properly seated or
his or her weight is taken off of the seat for a
period of time.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
SAFETY 229
(Continued)
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an
adult, allowing a full-power Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag deployment. Never
allow children to ride in the front passenger seat
and never install a child restraint system,
including a rear-facing child restraint, in the
front passenger seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. The OCS estimates the
seated weight on the front passenger seat and
where that weight is located. The OCS
communicates the classification status to the
ORC. The ORC uses the classification to
determine whether the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag inflation rate should be adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated
properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
Properly seated passengers are:
Sitting upright
Facing forward
Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet
comfortably on or near the floor
Sitting with their back against the seatback
and the seatback in an upright position
Seated Properly
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status Front Passenger Air Bag Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power deployment
Child, including a child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat* Reduced-power deployment OR Full-power deployment
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment OR reduced-power deployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power deployment
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
Children 12 years or younger should always
ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 SAFETY
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small
Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a
small adult, occupies the front passenger seat,
the OCS may reduce the inflation rate of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. This does
not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front
passenger’s seated weight on the front
passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be
properly positioned on the front passenger seat.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury or
death. The OCS determines the most probable
classification of the occupant that it detects.
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s
decreased or increased seated weight, which
may result in an adjusted inflation rate of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision.
This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly. Decreasing the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat may
result in a reduced-power deployment of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Increasing
the front passenger’s seated weight on the front
passenger seat may result in a full-power
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating
include:
The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm
rest or instrument panel).
The front passenger leans forward, sideways,
or turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
The front passenger’s seatback is not in the
full upright position.
The front passenger carries or holds an
object while seated (e.g., backpack, box,
etc.).
Objects are lodged under the front passenger
seat.
Objects are lodged between the front
passenger seat and center console.
Accessories that may change the seated
weight on the front passenger seat are
attached to the front passenger seat.
Anything that may decrease or increase the
front passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. If an occupant in the
front passenger seat is seated improperly, the
occupant may provide an output signal to the
OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
SAFETY 231
(Continued)
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument
panel will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to
classify the front passenger seat status. A
malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation
of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come
on, or stays on after you start the vehicle, or it
comes on as you drive, take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer for service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical
OCS components that may affect the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the
OCS to properly classify the seated weight of a
front seat passenger, the OCS components
must function as designed. Do not make any
WARNING!
If a child restraint system, child, small teen-
ager or adult in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may
provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different from the occupant’s properly
seated weight input. This may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
Always wear your seat belt and sit properly,
with the seatback in an upright position,
your back against the seatback, sitting
upright, facing forward, in the center of the
seat, with your feet comfortably on or near
the floor.
Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., back-
packs, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front
passenger seat. Holding an object may
provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different than the occupant’s properly
seated weight input, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
Placing an object on the floor under the
front passenger seat may prevent the OCS
from working properly, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision. Do not
place any objects on the floor under the
front passenger seat.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 SAFETY
modifications to the front passenger seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If
the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service
for any reason, take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only FCA US LLC approved seat
accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly
followed:
Do not modify the front passenger seat
assembly or components in any way.
Do not use prior or future model year seat
covers or cushions not designated by FCA US
LLC for the specific model being repaired.
Always use the correct seat cover and
cushion specified for the vehicle.
Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with
an aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
At no time should any Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) component or SRS
related component or fastener be modified
or replaced with any part except those which
are approved by FCA US LLC.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved
interaction with the front air bags.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column. The
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts,
pretensioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat
trim on the outboard side of the seats.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service proce-
dures to the passenger seat assembly, its
related components, seat cover or cushion
may inadvertently change the air bag
deployment in case of a frontal collision.
This could result in death or serious injury
to the front passenger if the vehicle is
involved in a collision. A modified vehicle
may not comply with required Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (CMVSS).
If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities,
contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights,
stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
SAFETY 233
(Continued)
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of
occupant injury during certain side impacts, in
addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat
seam into the space between the occupant and
the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed
and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows.
The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and
other injuries to front and rear seat outboard
occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers
the window. The SABICs inflate with enough
force to injure occupants if they are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a
deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain side impact
events.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
the performance could be adversely affected
and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage
or other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the
SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
6
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the
appropriate response to impact events. The
system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts
that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In
side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy
independently; a left side impact deploys the
left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of
whether or not Side Air Bags should have
deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not
impact the area of the passenger compartment.
The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or
offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended,
do not install any accessory items in your
vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not
add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle.
Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill
into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where
appropriate) are necessary for your protec-
tion in all collisions. They also help keep
you in position, away from an inflating Side
Air Bag. To get the best protection from the
Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be
properly restrained in a child restraint or
booster seat that is appropriate for the size
of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright
in the center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
SAFETY 235
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether deployment in a particular
rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event
may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle
experiences a rollover or near rollover event,
and deployment is appropriate, the rollover
sensing system will deploy the side air bags and
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the
vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain rollover or side
impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System
Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is
wrong with the air bag system.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt
to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 SAFETY
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not perma-
nent and normally heal quickly. However, if
you haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a
normal by-product of the process that gener-
ates the non-toxic gas used for air bag infla-
tion. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or
eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air.
If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If
these particles settle on your clothing, follow
the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the air bags will not be in place to
protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the inte-
rior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event,
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will
determine whether to have the Enhanced
Accident Response System perform the
following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
equipped).
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power.
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on
as long as the battery has power or for
15 minutes from the intervention of the
Enhanced Accident Response System.
Unlock the power door locks.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt
pretensioners cannot protect you in another
collision. Have the air bags, seat belt
pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
SAFETY 237
(Continued)
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform
any of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circula-
tion Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the igni-
tion to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and
remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid
draining the battery. Carefully check the vehicle
for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on
the ground near the engine compartment and
fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or
damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g.
headlights) after an accident, reset the system
by following the procedure described below. If
you have any doubt, contact an authorized
dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident
Response System functions after an event, the
ignition switch must be changed from ignition
START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start
after performing the reset procedure, the
vehicle must be towed to an authorized dealer
to be inspected and to have the Enhanced
Accident Response System reset.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to protect you. Do not modify
the components or wiring, including adding
any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front fascia/bumper, vehicle
body structure, or add aftermarket side
steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it
has an air bag system.
6
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 SAFETY
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up
at all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and
you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride
properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
According to crash statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air
bag system. The air bag may inflate acciden-
tally or may not function properly if modifica-
tions are made. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for any air bag system
service. If your seat, including your trim cover
and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening
of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to
an authorized dealer. Only manufacturer
approved seat accessories may be used. If it
is necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your
lap could become so great that you could not
hold the child, no matter how strong you are.
The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should
be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
SAFETY 239
There are different sizes and types of restraints
for children from newborn size to the child
almost large enough for an adult safety belt.
Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to
make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint
Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached
to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure
that it has a label certifying that it meets all
applicable Safety Standards. You should also
make sure that you can install it in the vehicle
where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or
call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and
who have not reached the height or weight limits
of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who
have outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit
the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
6
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 SAFETY
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types
of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from
birth until they reach the weight or height limit of
the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be
used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a
higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction
than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their
infant carrier but are still less than at least two
years old. Children should remain rear-facing
until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height
limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat.
Children should remain in a forward-facing child
seat with a harness for as long as possible, up
to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
SAFETY 241
(Continued)
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use
a belt-positioning booster seat until the
vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s
seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning
booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat
belt.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback, should
use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple
5-step test to decide whether the child can use
the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against
the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat while the child
is still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was
“no,” then the child still needs to use a booster
seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/
shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically
and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt
contacts the face or neck, move the child
closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the
child correctly.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of
an infant or child restraint. It could come
loose in a collision. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat
forward or rearward because it can loosen
the child restraint attachments. Remove
the child restraint before adjusting the
vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat
has been adjusted, reinstall the child
restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.
In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike
the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death. A child must always wear both the lap
and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
6
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 SAFETY
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands
for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points
for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There
are two lower anchorages located at the back of
the seat cushion where it meets the seatback
and one top tether anchorage located behind
the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these
seating positions, the seat belt must be used
with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
SAFETY 243
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
60/40 Second Row LATCH Positions (5 Passenger)
60/40 Second Row LATCH Positions (7 Passenger) Captain’s Chairs Second Row LATCH Positions
(6 Passenger)
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
6
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight
of the child restraint) for using the LATCH
anchorage system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be
used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing
or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower
anchorages from the outboard seating
positions?
No — 5 Passenger
N/A — 6 Passenger
No — 7 Passenger
7 and 5 Passenger: Use the seat belt and tether
anchor to install a child seat in the center
seating position.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
SAFETY 245
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback.
They are just visible when you lean
into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat
cushion.
Five Passenger Rear Seat Lower Anchorages Six Passenger Second Row Lower Anchorages
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or
more child restraints. If the center position does
not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat in the
center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
6
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 SAFETY
Seven Passenger Second Row Lower Anchorages
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
Five Passenger Vehicles: 2nd Row Upper Tether
Anchorage Locations
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat. To access them, pull the carpeted floor
panel away from the seat back, this will expose
the top tether strap anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap Anchorage (Five Passenger)
Five Passenger Top Tether Strap Mounting
Six And Seven Passenger Vehicles: 2nd Row
Upper Tether Anchorage Locations
There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear
seating position located on the back of the seat.
Six Passenger Top Tether Strap Mounting
(Captain's Chair)
Seven Passenger Top Tether Strap Mounting
(2nd Row Bench)
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
SAFETY 247
Six And Seven Passenger Vehicles: 3rd Row
Upper Tether Anchorage Locations
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat. To access them, pull the carpeted floor
panel away from the seat back, this will expose
the top tether strap anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap (3rd Row Bench)
Tether Anchorages (3rd Row Bench)
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will
be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap
on each side. Each will have a hook or
connector to attach to the lower anchorage and
a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and
some rear-facing child restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap
will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH — Five Or Seven
Passenger Vehicles Second Row
Seating Only
WARNING!
Do not install a child restraint in the center
position using the LATCH system. This posi-
tion is not approved for installing child
seats using the LATCH attachments. You
must use the seat belt and tether anchor to
install a child seat in the center seating
position.
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. For
typical installation instructions, see
Ú page 248.
6
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 SAFETY
Vehicle With A Center Arm Rest Tether —
Five Or Seven Passenger Seating Only
For rear-facing child restraints secured in the
center seat position with the vehicle seat belts,
the rear center seat position has an armrest
tether that secures the arm rest in the upward
position.
1. To access the center seat arm rest tether,
first lower the arm rest. The tether is
located behind the armrest and hooked
onto the plastic seat backing.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Release Strap
2. Pull down on the tether to unhook it from
the plastic seat backing.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
3. Raise the armrest and attach the tether
hook to the strap located on the front of the
arm rest.
Always follow the directions of the child
restraint manufacturer when installing your
child restraint. Not all child restraint systems
will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the
instructions below. See Ú page 249 to check
what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps
and on the tether strap of the child seat so
that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. If the
second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move
the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in
the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
connect it to the top tether anchorage. See
Ú page 252 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
SAFETY 249
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into
the seat. Remove slack in the straps
according to the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
that are not being used by other occupants or
being used to secure child restraints. An unused
belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the
buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is
designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode
by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor
and then letting the webbing retract back into
the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor Ú page 223.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to
the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
6
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
60/40 Second Row (5 Passenger) Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
60/40 Second Row (7 Passenger) Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
Captain’s Chairs Second Row (6 Passenger) Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach
a forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the
Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to
install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended
weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front
passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child
restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against
the belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR
retractor.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
SAFETY 251
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/
or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to
get a better fit. If the rear seat can be
moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt path
of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
If it is locked, you should not be able to pull
out any webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. For
directions to attach a tether anchor, see
Ú page 252.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
6
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
1. Look behind the seating position where
you plan to install the child restraint to find
the tether anchorage. You may need to
move the seat forward to provide better
access to the tether anchorage. If there is
no top tether anchorage for that seating
position, move the child restraint to
another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. To access the top tether strap anchorages
behind the rear seat, pull the carpeted floor
panel away from the seat back, this will
expose the top tether strap anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap Anchorage (Five Passenger)
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap Anchorage (3rd Row Bench)
Third Row Top Tether Strap Anchorage
(Located On Seatback)
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is
equipped with adjustable rear head
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing
car seat to any location in front of the car
seat, including the seat frame or a tether
anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a
rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat.
See Ú page 242 for the location of approved
tether anchorages in your vehicle.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
SAFETY 253
(Continued)
restraints, raise the head restraint, and
where possible, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the two
posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around
the outboard side of the head restraint.
4. For the center seating position, route the
tether strap over the seatback and headrest
then attach the hook to the tether anchor
located on the back of the seat.
5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
Bench Seat Top Tether Strap Mounting
(5 Passenger Seating)
Second Row Bench Seat Top Tether Strap Mounting
(7 Passenger Seating)
Third Row Seating Top Tether Strap Mounting
Captain’s Chair Top Tether Strap Mounting
6. Remove slack in the tether strap according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
WARNING!
The top tether anchorages are not visible
until the gap panel is folded down. Do not
use the visible cargo tie down hooks,
located on the floor behind the seats, to
attach a child restraint tether anchor.
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and possible
injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
position directly behind the child seat to
secure a child restraint top tether strap.
6
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 SAFETY
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
about and possibly injured, or injure a
passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must
be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first placed in the ON/RUN
mode. If the light is either not on during starting,
stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light
will illuminate with a single chime when a fault
with the Air Bag System has been detected. It
will stay on until the fault is removed. If the light
comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately Ú page 216.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode
and place the blower control on high speed. You
should be able to feel the air directed against
the windshield. See an authorized dealer for
service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not
interfere with the operation of the accelerator,
brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that
is securely attached using the floor mat
fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle
in other ways.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seat-
backs as you remove slack in the strap.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat
build-up may cause serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
SAFETY 255
(Continued)
(Continued)
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,
glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or
sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.
Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the lug nut/bolt torque for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold
inflation pressure.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to
interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER install
or stack an additional floor mat on top of an
existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that
cannot be properly attached and secured to
your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be
replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year
of your vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for inter-
ference, with the vehicle properly parked
with the engine off, fully depress the accel-
erator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if
present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and
place the floor mat in your trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area when
the vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects
could change the position of the floor mat
and may cause interference with the accel-
erator, brake, or clutch pedals.
WARNING! (Continued)
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet
to the floor and check the floor mat
fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
Fully depress each pedal to check for inter-
ference with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat has
been properly installed and is secured to
your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 SAFETY
(Continued)
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have an authorized dealer inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, inspect the exhaust system each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or
in confined areas any longer than needed
to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO
NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running, adjust your heating
or cooling controls to force outside air into
the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to
prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in
a closed area, such as a garage, and never
sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the
engine running for more than a short
period, adjust the ventilation system to
force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with
proper maintenance. Have the exhaust
system inspected every time the vehicle is
raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
257
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located on
the switch bank just below the climate controls.
Hazard Warning Flashers Switch
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the switch is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to
warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push
the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard
Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and
it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning
Flashers may discharge the battery.
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Mirror
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an
ASSIST and a SOS button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber Ú page 346.
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only func-
tion if you are connected to an operable LTE
(voice/data), 3G or 4G (data) network, which
comes as a built in function. Other Uconnect
services will only be operable if your SiriusXM
Guardian™ service is active and you are
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data),
3G or 4G (data) network.
1 — SOS Button
2 — ASSIST Button
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
7
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
connect you to any one of the following support
centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire,
or need a tow, just push the ASSIST button
and you will be connected to a representa-
tive for assistance. Roadside Assistance will
know what vehicle you’re driving and its
location. Additional fees may apply for road-
side assistance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care –
In-vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all
other vehicle issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview
Mirror.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS
Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To
cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS
call button on the Rearview Mirror or press the
cancellation button on the Device Screen.
Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the
green LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST
and SOS buttons on the Rearview Mirror will
turn green once a connection to a SOS
operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and
a SOS operator is made, the SOS Call
system may transmit the following
important vehicle information to a SOS
operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a
SOS Call
The vehicle brand
The last known GPS coordinates of the
vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
operator through the vehicle audio system
to determine if additional assistance is
needed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper-
ator, the SOS operator may be able to open a
voice connection with the vehicle to deter-
mine if additional assistance is needed. Once
the SOS operator opens a voice connection
with the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the oper-
ator should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring
in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system
will attempt to remain connected with the
SOS operator until the SOS operator termi-
nates the connection.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the features
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the
features and applications when it is safe to do so.
Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 259
(Continued)
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle
information and GPS coordinates.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in
Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS
system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
any of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
each ignition cycle:
The Rearview Mirror light located between
the ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously
illuminate red.
The Device Screen will display the following
message “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact an authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state
“Vehicle device requires service. Please
contact an authorized dealer.”
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
road conditions or location), do not wait for
voice contact from an Emergency Services
Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the
vehicle’s operable network and GPS
antennas. You could prevent operable
network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call. An operable network and
GPS signal reception is required for the SOS
Call system to function properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add
aftermarket electrical equipment to the
vehicle’s electrical system. This may
prevent your vehicle from sending a signal
to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the SOS Call system
to fail, never add aftermarket equipment
(e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data
recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
system or modify the antennas on your
vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to
fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to help
protect you.
WARNING! (Continued)
7
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may
prevent or stop the SOS Call system operation.
These include, but are not limited to, the
following factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
The SOS Call system software and/or hard-
ware are damaged during a crash
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash
LTE (voice/data), 3G or 4G (data) network
and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals
are unavailable or obstructed
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility
Operator error by the SOS operator
LTE (voice/data), 3G or 4G (data) network
congestion
Weather
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data), 3G or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/
data), 3G or 4G (data) and GPS signal recep-
tion, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call. An operable LTE
(voice/data), 3G or 4G (data) network
connection and a GPS signal is required for
the SOS Call system to function properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could
mean you will not have SOS Call services. If
the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated,
have an authorized dealer service the SOS
Call system immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module
turns on the air bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction in any
part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant
Restraint Control system immediately.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution
directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution
onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 261
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as
far from the edge of the roadway as
possible. Avoid icy or slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if changing the driver’s front tire,
block the passenger’s rear tire.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being raised or lifted.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid the danger
of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the
jack and fall on you. You could be crushed.
Never put any part of your body under a
vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
7
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JACK LOCATION
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are
located in rear cargo area, below the load floor.
Cargo Floor Handle
Jack Storage Location
To remove, press down firmly on the tabs on the
jack storage cover.
Jack Storage Cover Tabs
Thumb Screw Location
Rotate the plastic thumb screw on the end of
the jack to loosen the jack and remove from the
bracket.
Jack Removal
SPARE TIRE STOWAGE
The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the
vehicle by means of a cable winch mechanism.
To remove or stow the spare, use the jack
handle/lug wrench connected to the square
socket extension to rotate the “spare tire drive”
nut. The nut is located under a plastic cover at
the center-rear of the cargo floor area, just
inside the liftgate opening.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 263
Spare Tire Location
SPARE TIRE REMOVAL
Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack
up the vehicle. The spare tire is stowed
underneath the rear cargo area on the outside
of the vehicle.
1. Remove the jack tools from the bag.
2. Raise the rubber mat and remove the plug
from storage compartment floor.
Winch Nut Plug
3. Fit the jack handle extension over the drive
nut. Use the lug wrench handle and
extension to completely lower the spare tire.
Keep turning the handle counterclockwise
until the winch stops.
Winch Location
Wrench Rotation
4. Slide the tire out from under the vehicle and
rotate it vertically behind the rear fascia/
bumper.
Spare Tire
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use
with the jack wrench extension tool only. Use
of air wrench or power tool may damage the
winch.
7
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
5. Pull the metal stamping toward you to
release it from the plastic plate.
Spare Tire Retainer
6. Slide the metal stamping up the steel
extension tube and winch cable. Rotate the
metal stamping and push it through the
hole in the plastic plate and wheel.
Sleeve And Cable
7. Pinch the three short and two long tubes to
remove the protective plate from the steel
spare wheel.
Releasing Protective Plate
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings
to help prevent personal injury or damage to
your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible
before raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it
is on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
change.
If working on or near a roadway, be
extremely careful of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated,
are securely stowed, spares must be
stowed with the valve stem facing the
ground.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 265
Jack Warning Label
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug
nuts by turning them to the left, one turn,
while the wheel is still on the ground.
2. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
Jack And Tool Assembly
Jacking Locations
3. For the front tire, place the jack on the body
flange just behind the front tire. Do not raise
the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully
engaged.
Front Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
7
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on
the rear tie-down bracket, just forward of
the rear tire. Do not raise the vehicle until
you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw
clockwise. Raise the vehicle just enough to
remove the flat tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Install the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle
and install the lug nuts with the
cone-shaped end toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten the nuts.
Mounting Spare Tire
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw
counterclockwise, and remove the jack and
wheel blocks.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off
the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious
injury.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
damaged if the spare tire is mounted
incorrectly.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 267
9. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push
down on the wrench while at the end of the
handle for increased leverage. Tighten the
wheel bolts in a star pattern until each
wheel bolt has been tightened twice. If in
doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by an
authorized dealer or at a service station
Ú page 335.
10. Push out the small center cap using the jack
tool from inside the aluminum road wheel
and position the wheel behind the rear
fascia/bumper with the protective plate
facing outward.
Installing Protective Plate On Damaged Wheel
NOTE:
The plastic plate will prevent the road wheel
from being scratched when sliding it under the
vehicle.
11. Insert the two long tubes on the plastic
protective plate in the lug holes of the road
wheel. Push the end of the winch’s cable,
spring, steel sleeve and stamped cone
shape wheel plate though the road wheel
and protective plate.
Installing Winch
12. Slide the road wheel on the ground using
the protective plate until it is directly under
the winch and between the rear fascia/
bumper and exhaust system heat shields.
Raise the tire by turning the lug wrench on
the winch extension clockwise until it
clicks/ratchets three times to make sure
the cable is tight.
Wrench Rotation
Road Wheel Installed In Spare Location
7
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
Double check to ensure the tire is snug against
the underbody of the vehicle. Damage to the
winch cable may result if the vehicle is driven
with the tire loose.
13. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that
all lug nuts are properly seated against the
wheel.
14. Lower the jack to the fully closed position.
Return the tools to the proper positions in
the tool bag. Fold the flap on the tool bag
under the tools and roll the tools in the bag
underneath the others. Use the hook and
loop fasteners to secure the tool bag to the
jack with the lug wrench on the forward side
of the jack. Expand the jack on the bracket
by turning the thumb screw clockwise until
it is tight to prevent rattles.
15. Reinstall the plastic plug into the floor of the
cargo area. Roll up and store the Jack, Tool
Kit and Tire Changing Instructions. Reinstall
the cover for the jack in the rear storage bin.
16. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire
repaired as soon as possible and properly
secure the spare tire, jack and tool kit.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can
be jump started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a
portable battery booster pack. Jump starting
can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer's operating instruc-
tions and precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located under the
passenger's front seat. There are remote
terminals located under the hood to assist in
jump starting.
Under Hood Jump Starting Location
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use
with the jack wrench extension tool only. Use
of air wrench or power tool may damage the
winch.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop, could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the
spare tire in the places provided.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter
motor, alternator or electrical system may occur.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 269
Jump Starting Posts
NOTE:
Be sure that the disconnected cable ends do
not touch each other, or either vehicle, until
properly connected for jump starting.
See below steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the
automatic transmission into PARK (P) and
turn the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the
remote positive (+) battery post. Pull
upward on the cover to remove it.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, apply the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
Make sure at all times that unused ends of
jumper cables are not contacting each other or
either vehicle while making connections.
Remote Positive (+) Post
Remote Negative (-) Post
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can
be injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact. You
could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate
hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks
away from the battery.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system of
the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
7
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the remote positive (+)
post of the
discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to a good engine ground. A
“ground” is an exposed metallic/unpainted
part of the engine, frame or chassis, such as
an accessory bracket or large bolt. The
ground must be away from the battery and
the fuel injection system.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the
disconnecting procedure below.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-) end of the
jumper cable from the remote negative (-)
post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of
the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+) jumper cable from the remote positive
(+) post of the discharged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle have the battery and charging system
tested at an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause the
battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above
2,000 RPM since it provides no charging
benefit, wastes fuel, and can damage booster
vehicle engine.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough
without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 271
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel.
If refueling is necessary, while using an
approved gas can, please insert the refueling
funnel into the filler neck opening.
Refueling Funnel
Inserting Funnel
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors.
A funnel is provided to allow emergency
refueling with a gas can.
See below steps for refueling
1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage
area.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening
as the fuel nozzle.
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold
flapper doors open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off
prior to putting back in the spare tire
storage area.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be
serviced by an authorized dealer.
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating by taking
the appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase
the engine idle speed while preventing
vehicle motion with the brakes.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
fuel containers on the ground while filling.
7
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can
help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the
heater core to act as a supplement to the
radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such
as a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release
is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park
Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Open the center console and locate the
Manual Park Release cover, remove it by
snapping the cover away from the console
hinges.
Manual Park Release Cover
3. Press and maintain firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming
from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle.
Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned
off until the pointer drops back into the normal
range. If the pointer remains on HOT (H), and
you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine
off immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying
the parking brake before activating the
Manual Park Release. In addition, you should
be seated in the driver’s seat with your foot
firmly on the brake pedal when activating the
Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual
Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll
away if it is not secured by the parking brake,
or by proper connection to a tow vehicle.
Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury
or death for those in or around the vehicle.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 273
4. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, push the
metal latch in towards the tether strap.
Release Latch
5. While the metal latch is in the open position,
pull upward on the tether strap until the
lever clicks and latches in the released
position. The transmission is now out of
PARK (P) and the vehicle can be moved.
Released Position
NOTE:
To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintention-
ally, firmly apply the parking brake.
To Disengage The Manual Park Release Lever:
1. To disengage the Manual Park Release,
apply tension upward while pushing the
release latch towards the tether to unlock
the lever.
Release Latch
CAUTION!
Closing the armrest while the Manual Park
Release is activated may damage the Manual
Park Release mechanism, the transmission,
and/or the armrest.
7
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Once the tension has been released and the
lever has been unlocked, be sure it is
stowed properly and locks into position.
Stowed Position
NOTE:
Be sure to replace the cover by snapping it back
in place.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Push
and hold the lock button on the gear selector.
Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE (D)
and REVERSE (R) while gently pressing the
accelerator.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can
only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission
remains in NEUTRAL (N) for more than two
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion
without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
Push the ESC OFF switch to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF”
mode, before rocking the vehicle Ú page 202.
Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC
OFF switch again to restore ESC On mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and
tires. A tire could explode and injure someone.
Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when
you are stuck and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels
may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the
transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of transmission failure
during prolonged efforts to free a stuck
vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h),
or drivetrain damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels
too fast may lead to transmission over-
heating and failure. It can also damage the
tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission
shifting occurring).
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 275
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled 4x4 vehicles may also be towed as described under Ú page 164.
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF The
Ground
Rear-Wheel Drive
Models
All-Wheel Drive
Models With
Single-Speed
Transfer Case
All-Wheel Drive Models With Two-Speed
Transfer Case
Flat Tow NONE
If Transmission Is
Operable:
Transmission in
NEUTRAL
30 mph (48 km/h)
max speed
30 miles (48 km)
max distance
NOT ALLOWED
Detailed Instructions Ú page 164
Transmission in PARK
Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
Tow in forward direction
7
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow
bars and other equipment designed for this
purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.
Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to
fascia/bumpers or associated brackets. State
and local laws regarding vehicles under tow
must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC
mode.
If the vehicle's battery is discharged,
instructions on shifting the automatic
transmission out of PARK (P) in order to move
the vehicle can be found on Ú page 272.
Wheel Lift Or Dolly
Tow
Front
If Transmission Is
Operable:
Transmission in
NEUTRAL
30 mph (48 km/h)
max speed
30 miles (48 km)
max distance
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD OK BEST METHOD
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF The
Ground
Rear-Wheel Drive
Models
All-Wheel Drive
Models With
Single-Speed
Transfer Case
All-Wheel Drive Models With Two-Speed
Transfer Case
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen-
sion components. Damage to your vehicle
may result from improper towing.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 277
REAR WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle
with all four wheels OFF the ground using a
flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transmission is operable, the vehicle may be
towed (with rear wheels on the ground) under
the following conditions:
The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N).
For instructions on shifting the transmission
to NEUTRAL (N) when the engine is off
Ú page 272.
The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph
(48 km/h).
The towing distance must not exceed
30 miles (48 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the
vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) or farther than 30 miles (48 km), tow
with the rear wheels OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a
flatbed, or with the front wheels raised and the
rear wheels on a towing dolly, or (when using a
suitable steering wheel stabilizer to hold the
front wheels in the straight position) with the
rear wheels raised and the front wheels ON the
ground.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow
the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the
vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing
dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transfer case is operable, vehicles with a
two-speed transfer case may be towed (in the
forward direction, with ALL wheels on the
ground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N)
and the transmission is in PARK Ú page 164.
Vehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer
case have no NEUTRAL (N) position, and
therefore must be towed will all four wheels OFF
the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or
farther than 30 miles (48 km) with rear
wheels on the ground can cause severe
transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
This feature is a communication network that
takes effect in the event of an impact
Ú page 236.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an EDR. The main
purpose of an EDR is to record data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed under certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle
Ú page 238.
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if
the remaining wheels are on the ground).
Internal damage to the transmission or
transfer case will occur if a front or rear
wheel lift is used when towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
279
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is time to
take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent
short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Oil Change Required”
message is displayed. Severe Operating
Conditions can cause the change oil message
to illuminate as early as
3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have
your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within the next 500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level
Check windshield washer fluid level
Check the tire pressure and look for unusual
wear or damage
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder and fill as needed
Check function of all interior and exterior
lights
8
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the Maintenance Plans for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions. Replace engine air cleaner filter, if necessary.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 281
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends,
and replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking
brake function.
X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace the cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.
1
X
8
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Flush and replace the engine coolant
at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
Replace accessory drive belt. X
Inspect accessory drive belt tensioner
and pulley, replace if necessary.
X
Change transfer case fluid. X
Replace PCV valve. X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 283
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L ENGINE
1 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 6 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
8
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
5.7L ENGINE
1 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal 6 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
3 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 10 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 285
(Continued)
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine
oil must be maintained at the correct level.
Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as
every fuel stop. The best time to check the
engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the
low end of the range and MAX at the high end
of the range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at
the MIN and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the cross-
hatch markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1.0 liter) of oil when the reading
is at the low end of the dipstick range will raise
the oil level to the high end of the range
marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The instrument cluster display will indicate when
the washer fluid level is low. When the sensor
detects a low fluid level, the windshield will light
on the vehicle graphic outline and the “WASHER
FLUID LOW” message will be displayed.
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers
and the rear window washer is shared. The fluid
reservoir is located in the engine compartment,
be sure to check the fluid level at regular
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or
towel and wipe clean the wiper blades, this will
help blade performance. To prevent freeze-up
of your windshield washer system in cold
weather, select a solution or mixture that meets
or exceeds the temperature range of your
climate. This rating information can be found on
most washer fluid containers.
MAINTENANCE -FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free
battery. Water will never have to be added, and
periodic maintenance is not required.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This
could damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling
or working around the washer solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps Ú page 268. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area
immediately with large amounts of water.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output greater
than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
8
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result
in civil penalties being assessed against you.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, FCA only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified
and meet the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS-6395.
NOTE:
Hemi engines (5.7L) at times can tick right after
startup and then quiet down after approxi-
mately 30 seconds. This is normal and will not
harm the engine. This characteristic can be
caused by short drive cycles. For example, if the
vehicle is started then shut off after driving a
Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is
attached to the positive post and the nega-
tive cable is attached to the negative post.
Battery posts are marked positive (+) and
negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery
is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle
battery cables before connecting the
charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting voltage.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the
pressures generated by these machines is
such that complete protection against water
ingress cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service work
for which you have the knowledge and the
proper equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 287
short distance. Upon restarting, you may experi-
ence a ticking sound. Other causes could be if
the vehicle is unused for an extended period of
time, incorrect oil, extended oil changes or
extended idling. If the engine continues to tick
or if the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes
on, see the nearest authorized dealer.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine
Oil Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). FCA only
recommends API Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30,
5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
recommended oil quality requirements are met,
and the recommended maintenance intervals
for oil and filter changes are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
FCA strongly recommends against the addition
of any additives (other than leak detection dyes)
to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired
by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used
engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used
oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact
an authorized dealer, service station or
governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely
discarded in your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a
new filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be
used for replacement. The quality of
replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality Mopar certified filters should be
used.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 280.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil
as the chemicals can damage your engine.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the
case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.)
unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near
the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so
can result in serious personal injury.
8
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality Mopar certified
filters should be used.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and/or
debris. If you find evidence of either dirt or
debris, change the engine air cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Release the spring clips from the engine air
cleaner filter cover.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to
access the engine air cleaner filter.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from
the housing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the engine air cleaner
filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the
housing assembly with the engine air
cleaner filter inspection surface facing
downward.
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover
onto the housing assembly locating tabs.
3. Latch the spring clips and lock the engine
air cleaner filter cover to the housing
assembly.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air
conditioner should be checked and serviced by
an authorized dealer at the start of each warm
season. This service should include cleaning of
the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive
belt tension should also be checked at this time.
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Spring Clips
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by FCA for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved
refrigerants are flammable and can
explode, injuring you. Other unapproved
refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs.
Refer to Warranty Information Book, for
further warranty information.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 289
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a — If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is an
ozone-friendly substance. FCA recommends
that air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only FCA approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-1234yf — If Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. FCA recommends
that air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only FCA approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 280.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
behind the glove compartment. Perform the
following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove
all contents.
Glove Compartment
2. There are glove compartment travel stops
on both sides of the glove compartment
door. Partially close the glove compartment
door and push inward to release the glove
compartment travel stop on one side and
repeat this procedure for the opposite side.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring
lines to be disconnected should be done by
an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air
filter removed and the blower operating, the
blower can contact hands and may propel dirt
and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
8
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. Pull the right hand side of the glove
compartment door toward the rear of the
vehicle to disengage the glove
compartment door from its hinges.
NOTE:
When disengaging the glove compartment door
from its hinges, there will be some resistance.
4. With the glove compartment door loose,
remove the glove compartment tension
tether and tether clip by sliding the clip
toward the face of the glove compartment
door and lifting the clip out of glove
compartment door.
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
5. Remove the filter cover by disengaging the
retaining tab and mid way snap that secures
the filter cover to the HVAC housing.
Disengage the mid way snap by pulling the
door outward. Unhinge the filter cover on the
right side to fully remove the cover.
A/C Air Filter Cover
6. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it
straight out of the housing.
7. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the
filter pointing toward the floor. When
installing the filter cover, make sure the
retaining tabs fully engage the cover.
8. Reinstall the glove compartment door on
the door hinge and reattach the tension
tether by inserting the tether clip in the
glove compartment and sliding the clip
away from the face of the glove
compartment door.
9. Push the door to the near closed position to
reengage the glove compartment travel
stops.
NOTE:
Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
glove compartment travel stops are fully
engaged.
1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Door
1 — Retaining Tab
2 — Mid Way Snap
3 — Filter Cover Hinge
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow
to indicate airflow direction through the filter.
Failure to properly install the filter will result
in the need to replace it more often.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 291
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small
cracks that run across the ribbed surface of the
belt from rib to rib, are considered normal. This
is not a reason to replace belt. However, cracks
running along a rib (not across) are not normal.
Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has
excessive wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has sepa-
rated from belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between
two ribs)
Belt slips
“Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
correct position on pulley)
Belt broken (note: identify and correct
problem before new belt is installed)
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or
rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in
operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the
use of special tools. We recommend having
your vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points
and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding
doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated
periodically. Use a lithium-based grease, such
as Mopar Spray White Lube to ensure quiet,
easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant,
the parts concerned should be wiped clean to
remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When
performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory
drive belt with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time regardless of ignition mode. You could
be injured by the moving fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a compe-
tent mechanic.
8
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and
Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality
lubricant, such as Mopar Lock Cylinder
Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and
the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft
cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or
ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber
out of contact with petroleum products such as
engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies
depending on geographical area and frequency
of use. If chattering, marks, water lines or wet
spots are present, clean the wiper blades or
replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
inspected periodically, not just when wiper
performance problems are experienced. This
inspection should include the following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged,
replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a
new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm
or blade that is damaged.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade
off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the
full up position.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in
place or the glass may be damaged.
1 — Wiper
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 293
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, flip up the release tab on the wiper
blade and while holding the wiper arm with
one hand, slide the wiper blade down
towards the base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the
wiper blade from the wiper arm by holding
the wiper arm with one hand and separating
the wiper blade from the wiper arm with the
other hand (move the wiper blade toward the
right side of the vehicle to separate the wiper
blade from the wiper arm).
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on
the tip of the wiper arm with the wiper
release tab open and the blade side of the
wiper facing up and away from the
windshield.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through
the opening in the wiper blade under the
release tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on
the wiper arm and rotate the wiper blade
until it is flush against the wiper arm. Fold
down the latch release tab and snap it into
its locked position. Latch engagement will
be accompanied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
8
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
294 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from
the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be
raised off of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is
unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the
rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper
arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle.
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, grasp the bottom end of the wiper
blade nearest to wiper arm with your right
hand. With your left hand hold the wiper arm
as you pull the wiper blade away from the
wiper arm past its stop far enough to
unsnap the wiper blade pivot pin from the
receptacle on the end of the wiper arm.
NOTE:
Resistance will be accompanied by an audible
snap.
4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper
blade, move the wiper blade upward and
away from the wiper arm to disengage.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto
the glass.
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Blade
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
3 — Wiper Arm Receptacle
4 — Wiper Arm
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 295
(Continued)
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from
the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be
raised off of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is
unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the
rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper
arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the
opening on the end of the wiper arm. Grab
the bottom end of the wiper arm with one
hand, and press the wiper blade flush with
the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and
snap the wiper arm pivot cap back into
place.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the
exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle; or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or
oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They
contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Breathing it can
make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you. To avoid breathing CO see
Ú page 254.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such
materials might be grass or leaves coming
into contact with your exhaust system. Do
not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as
an emissions control device and may seri-
ously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
8
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295
296 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Under normal operating conditions, the
catalytic converter will not require
maintenance. However, it is important to keep
the engine properly tuned to ensure proper
catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching
odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn
off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to FCA's specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the trans-
mission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition
components disconnected or removed, such
as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged
periods during very rough idle or malfunc-
tioning operating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
Damage to the catalytic converter can
result if your vehicle is not kept in proper
operating condition. In the event of engine
malfunction, particularly involving engine
misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced
promptly. Continued operation of your
vehicle with a severe malfunction could
cause the converter to overheat, resulting
in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when
the hood is raised. The fan starts automati-
cally and may start at any time, whether the
engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the
ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time the ignition is in the ON mode.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 297
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze)
protection every 12 months (before the onset of
freezing weather, where applicable). If the
engine coolant is dirty, the system should be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming
to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check
the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean
by gently spraying water from a garden hose
vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and
tightness of the connection at the coolant
recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE
COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING
SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 280.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information Ú page 340.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant, may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protec-
tion. OAT engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant or
any “globally compatible” coolant. If a
non-OAT engine coolant is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling
system will need to be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as
they may not be compatible with the radiator
engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant.
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant
is not recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can
be used up to 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
reducing this extended maintenance period, it
is important that you use the same engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
throughout the life of your vehicle.
8
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297
298 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Please review these recommendations for
using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032. When adding
engine coolant:
We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT that meets the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled
water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact an
authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/
engine coolant solution. The use of lower
quality water will reduce the amount of corro-
sion protection in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in
the area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system, please contact a local autho-
rized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed
in an emergency, have a authorized dealer
drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss
of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure
that engine coolant will return to the radiator
from the coolant expansion bottle/recovery
tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if
there is any accumulation of foreign material on
the sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze)
is a regulated substance requiring proper
disposal. Check with your local authorities to
determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain
in puddles on the ground, clean up any ground
spills immediately. If ingested, seek emergency
assistance immediately.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated
engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in
the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the
one specified for your vehicle. Personal
injury or engine damage may result.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 299
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compart-
ment. This is normally a result of moisture from
rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on
the radiator and being vaporized when the ther-
mostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks,
the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will
soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant needs to be added, the contents of
the coolant expansion bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are
required, the cooling system should be pres-
sure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine which
contains aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning,
keep the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever
necessary, install ONLY the correct type ther-
mostat. Other designs may result in unsatis-
factory engine cooling performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance,
all brake system components should be
inspected periodically. For the proper
maintenance intervals Ú page 280.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced, or
immediately if the brake system warning light is
on. If necessary, add fluid to bring level within
the designated marks on the side of the
reservoir of the brake master cylinder. Be sure
to clean the top of the master cylinder area
before removing cap. With disc brakes, fluid
level can be expected to fall as the brake pads
wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when
pads are replaced. If the brake fluid is
abnormally low, check the system for leaks. For
further information Ú page 341.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot
resting or riding on the brake pedal can result
in abnormally high brake temperatures,
excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
8
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299
300 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
FCA strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired
by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not
add any fluid additives to the transmission.
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required; therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an
improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Use only FCA recommended brake fluid
Ú
page 341. Using the wrong type of brake
fluid can severely damage your brake system
and/or impair its performance. The proper
type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also
identified on the original factory installed
hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter
or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid
that has been in a tightly closed container.
Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap
secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open
container absorbs moisture from the air
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or
prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.
Brake fluid can also damage painted and
vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to
contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
components could be damaged, causing
partial or complete brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage
your transmission components. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An
authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 301
Routine fluid and filter changes are not
required. However, change the fluid and filter if
the fluid becomes contaminated (with water,
etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for
any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission
fluid to ensure optimum transmission
performance and life. Use only the FCA's
specified transmission fluid Ú page 341. It is
important to maintain the transmission fluid at
the correct level using the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant
should be used.
FRONT/REAR AXLE FLUID
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks
are not required. When the vehicle is serviced
for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the
axle assembly should be inspected. If gear oil
leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level.
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
The front axle oil level needs to be no lower
than 1/8 inch (3 mm) below the bottom of the
fill hole.
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be
tightened to 22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
The rear axle oil level needs to be no lower
than 1/8 inch (3 mm) below the bottom of the
fill hole.
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be
tightened to 22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the FCA's recommended fluid
Ú page 341.
TRANSFER CASE
Fluid Level Check
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks
are not required. When the vehicle is serviced
for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the
transfer case assembly should be inspected. If
oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level.
Adding Fluid
With the vehicle in a level position, fill the
transfer case to bottom edge of fill plug
opening.
Drain
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug.
Recommended tightening torque for drain and
fill plugs is 15 to 25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than FCA
recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder Ú page 341.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could
damage them and cause them to leak.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could
damage them and cause them to leak.
8
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301
302 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the FCA's recommended fluid
Ú page 341.
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check
the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a
break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery
discharge.
Blade Fuses
CAUTION!
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You
could damage them and cause them to leak.
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse. Never
replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity
or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses
may result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system, trans-
mission system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse
element
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
element (blown fuse)
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 303
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment near the battery jump
start posts. This center contains cartridge
fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers.
A description of each fuse and component may
be stamped on the inside cover, otherwise the
cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the
inside cover that corresponds to the following
chart.
Power Distribution Center Location Power Distribution Center
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F03 60 Amp Yellow – Radiator Fan — If Equipped
F05 40 Amp Green – Compressor for Air Suspension — If Equipped
F06 40 Amp Green – ABS Pump Mtr
F07 30 Amp Pink – Starter Solenoid
F09 30 Amp Pink –
Diesel Fuel Heater (Diesel Engine Only)/Brake Vacuum
Pump
F10 40 Amp Green – CBC #2/Exterior Lighting
F11 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Electric Brake — If Equipped
F12 40 Amp Green – CBC #3/Power Locks
F13 40 Amp Green – Blower Motor Front
8
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303
304 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F14 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #4/Exterior Lighting #1
F15 40 Amp Green –
Low Temperature Radiator (LTR) Engine Cooling Pump —
If Equipped
F17 30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Washer — If Equipped
F19 20 Amp Blue – Headrest Solenoid — If Equipped
F20 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module
F22 20 Amp Blue – Engine Control Module
F23 30 Amp Pink – CBC #1/Interior Lights
F24 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module
F25 30 Amp Pink – Front Wipers
F26 30 Amp Pink – ESP/ECU Valves
F28 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup Lights — If Equipped
F29 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Parking Lights — If Equipped
F30 30 Amp Pink –
Trailer Tow (Receptacle) / Trailer Tow (Separate E-Brake) /
Trailer Tow (BUX) — If Equipped
F32 30 Amp Pink – Drive Train Control Module
F34 30 Amp Pink – Slip Differential Control — If Equipped
F35 30 Amp Pink – Sunroof - If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 305
F36 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster/ Electronic BackLight (EBL)
F37 25 Amp Clear – Rear Blower Motor — If Equipped
F38 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter 115 Volt AC — If Equipped
F39 30 Amp Pink – Power Liftgate — If Equipped
F40 – 10 Amp Red Daytime Running Lights/Headlamp Leveling
F42 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F44 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port
F45 – 5 Amp Tan Cyber Security Gateway
F49 – 10 Amp Red Integrated Central Stack/Climate Control
F50 – 20 Amp Yellow
Air Suspension Control Module/Slip Differential -
If Equipped
F51 – 15 Amp Blue KIN/RF HUB/Steering Column Lock — If Equipped
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights — If Equipped
F56 – 15 Amp Blue PCM
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow NOX Sensor/PM Sensor/Fuel Htr
F58 – 15 Amp Blue HID Headlamps LH — If Equipped
F59 – 10 Amp Red SCR Pumps Relay
F60 – 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control Module
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
8
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305
306 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F61 – 10 Amp Red
Transmission Control Module/PM Sensor (Diesel Engine
Only)
F62 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow
Ignition Coils / Ignition Coil Capacitors / Short Runner
Valve Actuator — If Equipped (Gas) Urea Heater (Diesel)
F64 – 25 Amp Clear Fuel Injectors/Powertrain
F66 – 10 Amp Red
Sunroof/Rain Sensor/Inside Rear View Mirror / USB Port /
DSCR / DTV — If Equipped
F67 – 15 Amp Blue CDM/UCI Port/USB Port
F68 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Wiper Motor
F69 – 15 Amp Blue Spotlight Feed — If Equipped
F70 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Motor
F71 – 30 Amp Green Amplifier/ANCM — If Equipped
F72 – 10 Amp Red ECM/PCM
F73 – 15 Amp Blue HID Headlamp RH — If Equipped
F75 – 10 Amp Red Dual Battery Control — If Equipped
F76 – 10 Amp Red Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 307
F77 – 10 Amp Red
Drivetrain Control Module/Front Axle Disconnect Module
— If Equipped
F78 – 10 Amp Red
Engine Control Module (ECM) /Electric Power Steering/
PCM
F80 – 10 Amp Red
Universal Garage Door Opener/Anti-Intrusion Module —
If Equipped/Siren — If Equipped
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Turn/Stop Lights — If Equipped
F82 – 10 Amp Red
Steering Column Control Module/Cruise Control/DTV —
If Equipped
F83 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Door
F84 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Cluster
F85 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F86 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F87 – 10 Amp Red Air Suspension — If Equipped
F88 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster/SGW/ITBM — If Equipped
F90/F91 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet (Rear Seats) Selectable
F92 – 10 Amp Red Rear Console Lamp — If Equipped
F93 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F94 – 10 Amp Red Shifter/Transfer Case Module
F95 – 10 Amp Red Rear Camera / Blind Spot Sensor — If Equipped
F96 – 10 Amp Red
Rear Seat Heater Switch/Flashlamp Charger —
If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
8
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307
308 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow
Rear Heated Seats & Heated Steering Wheel —
If Equipped
F98 – 20 Amp Yellow Ventilated Seats/Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
F99 – 10 Amp Red
Climate Control/Driver Assistance Systems Module/HALF/
Park Assist
F100 – 10 Amp Red Active Damping — If Equipped
F101 – 15 Amp Blue ECCM/SMRT HI-Beams
F102 – 15 Amp Blue Spare
F103 – 10 Amp Red
Cabin Heater (Diesel Engine Only)/Rear HVAC —
If Equipped
F104 – 20 Amp Yellow
Power Outlets (Instrument Panel/Center Console/Rear
Cargo — If Equipped)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution
center cover, it is important to ensure the
cover is properly positioned and fully
latched. Failure to do so may allow water to
get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important
to use only a fuse having the correct
amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a
rating other than indicated may result in a
dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must
be corrected.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 309
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Glove Compartment Lamp 194
Grab Handle Lamp L002825W5W
Overhead Console Reading Lamps VT4976
Visor Vanity Lamp V26377
Rear Cargo Lamp 214–2
Underpanel Courtesy Lamps 906
Instrument Cluster (General Illumination) 103
Telltale/Hazard Lamp 74
8
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 309
310 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Low Beam/High Beam/LED Headlamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Turn Signal Lamps (Bulb Reflector) 7444NA
Front DRL/Turn/Park Lamp (Premium) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front DRL/Park Lamp (Base) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Side Marker Lamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Fog Lamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Rear Tail Lamps/Side Marker Lamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Rear Stop/Turn Signal Lamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Rear Backup Lamps 921 (W16W)
Rear License Lamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 310
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 311
Bulb Replacement
NOTE:
Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as
atmospheric conditions change to allow the
condensation to change back into a vapor.
Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the
clearing process.
Front Turn Signal
See below steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
2. Rotate the turn signal bulb a quarter turn
counterclockwise to remove from housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and
replace the bulb.
Front Fog Lamps
The front fog lamps are LEDs. See an authorized
dealer for service.
Rear Tail, Stop And Turn Signal Lamps
The rear tail, stop, and turn signal lamps are
LED. See an authorized dealer for replacement.
Rear Liftgate Mounted Back-up Lamps
See below steps to replace:
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to
pry the lower trim from the liftgate.
3. Back-up lamps are now visible. Rotate
socket(s) counterclockwise.
4. Remove/replace bulb(s).
5. Reinstall the socket(s).
6. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate
trim.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The Center High Mounted Stop Lamp is an LED
assembly. See an authorized dealer for
replacement.
Rear License Lamp
The rear license lamps are LEDs. See an
authorized dealer for service.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers.
Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb
life. If the bulb comes in contact with an oily
surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
8
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 311
312 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. P-Metric tires have the
letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding
the size designation. Example: P215/65R15
95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on
European design standards. Tires designed
to this standard have the tire size molded
into the sidewall beginning with the section
width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based
on US design standards. The size designation
for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric
tires except for the letters “LT” that are
molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for
temporary emergency use only. Temporary
high pressure compact spare tires have the
letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US
design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall. Example:
31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 312
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 313
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
8
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 313
314 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 314
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 315
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN,
including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the
vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:
031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
8
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 315
316 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of
the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended
pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a
minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure
for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure FCA recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 316
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 317
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in
the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on
your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load
carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading
conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard Ú page 151.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front
and rear axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle
loading, and trailer towing Ú page 151.
To determine the maximum loading conditions
of your vehicle, locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the
Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage
and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should
never exceed the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
8
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 317
318 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340
(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and
towing capacities of your vehicle with varying
seating configurations and number and size of
occupants. This table is for illustration
purposes only and may not be accurate for the
seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 318
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 319
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of
the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
8
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 319
320 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling
of sluggish response or over responsiveness in
the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a
comfortable ride. Overinflation produces a
jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the
driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgment when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly
inflated even when they are underinflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result
in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can
affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle
control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 320
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 321
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be
increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT
reduce this normal pressure build up or your
tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
FCA advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits
or conditions are such that the vehicle can be
driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire
inflation pressure is very important. Increased
tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may
be required for high-speed vehicle operation.
Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire
inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve
stem.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to fail.
You could have a serious collision. Do not
drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum
capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
four. Never combine them with other types of
tires.
8
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 321
322 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
repaired if it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an
inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that
have experienced a loss of pressure should be
replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire
of identical size and service description (Load
Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire
pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to
be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss
of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode.
A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not
repairable. When a Run Flat tire is changed
after driving with underinflated tire condition,
please replace the TPM sensor as it is not
designed to be reused when driven under Run
Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded
at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in
the Run Flat mode.
For more information Ú page 213.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice
conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 322
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 323
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original
equipment tires to help you in determining
when your tires should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of
the tread grooves. They will appear as bands
when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an
inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation
pressures can cause uneven wear patterns
to develop across the tire tread. These
abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
Distance driven
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
V or higher, and Summer tires typically have
a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires
per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is
highly recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well
when installing new tires due to wear and tear
in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Protect
tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
of many characteristics. They should be
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold
tire inflation pressures. FCA strongly
recommends that you use tires equivalent to
the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed Ú page 323.
Refer to the Tire and Loading Information
placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the
size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
For more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire Ú page 313.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after
six years, regardless of the remaining tread.
Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden
tire failure. You could lose control and have a
collision resulting in serious injury or death.
8
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 323
324 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
It is recommended to replace the two front tires
or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire
can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If
you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the
wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season
tires. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire
sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and
dry conditions, and are not intended to be
driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F
(5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow.
For more information, contact an authorized
dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for
your vehicle. Some combinations of unap-
proved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance
characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with
a smaller load index could result in tire
overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can
result in sudden tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a
different size may result in false speedometer
and odometer readings.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice
conditions. You could lose vehicle control,
resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too
fast for conditions also creates the possibility
of loss of vehicle control.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 324
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 325
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be
identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol
on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at
sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer
for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of
non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire
Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use
Ú page 159.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire
and wheel equivalent in look and function to
the original equipment tire and wheel found on
the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare
tire may be used in the tire rotation for your
vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to
an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin
with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than
one compact spare tire and wheel on the
vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with a compact or limited use
temporary spare installed. Damage to the
vehicle may result.
8
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 325
326 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary
emergency use only. You can identify if your
vehicle is equipped with a collapsible spare by
looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example:
165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump
before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the collapsible spare
wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically
for the collapsible spare tire.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire may look like the originally
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use full
size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is
not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a
label located on the limited use spare wheel.
This label contains the driving limitations for
this spare. This tire may look like the original
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited
use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it
is not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 326
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 327
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water
to maintain their luster and to prevent
corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the
vehicle and remember to always wash when the
surfaces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild
soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the
wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals
and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels.
Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar Chrome
Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for
aluminum or chrome wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels
with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply
the brakes to remove the water droplets from
the brake components. This activity will remove
the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not
drive more than the speed listed on the
limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the
cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of
the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do
so could result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that
use acidic solutions or strong alkaline
additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket
wheel cleaners and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel's protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
8
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 327
328 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or
Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient
tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance,
the following snow traction devices are
recommended. Follow these recommendations
to guard against damage.
Snow traction device must be of proper size
for the tire, as recommended by the snow
traction device manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use
with the snow traction device.
Please follow the table below for the recom-
mended tire size, axle and snow traction
device:
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these
specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel
cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds.
They will permanently damage this finish and
such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that
is required to maintain this finish.
RWD
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(maximum projection beyond
tire profile or equivalent)
SPECIAL SERVICE
Rear
P265/60R18
THULE XG-12 PRO or Equivalent
SXT
265/60R18
265/50R20
GT
R/T
CITADEL
265/50R20
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 328
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 329
AWD
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(maximum projection beyond
tire profile or equivalent)
PURSUIT
Rear
P265/60R18
P255/60R18
THULE XG-12 PRO or Equivalent
SXT
265/60R18
265/50R20
GT 265/50R20
CITADEL 265/50R20
R/T 265/50R20
R/T w/Tow N Go 295/45ZR20
Due to limited clearance, tire
chains or traction devices are not
recommended.
8
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 329
330 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, handling, and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation
of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such
as those on On/Off-Road type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow,
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 280. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to
rotation being performed.
NOTE:
The Tire Pressure Monitor System will automat-
ically locate the pressure values displayed in
the correct vehicle position following a tire rota-
tion.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward
cross” shown in the following diagram.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can
cause unpredictable handling. You could lose
control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clear-
ance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only trac-
tion devices in good condition are used.
Broken devices can cause serious damage.
Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage.
Remove the damaged parts of the device
before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km). Autosock traction devices do not
require retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded
vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed
of the device manufacturer’s if it is less
than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 330
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 331
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
8
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 331
332 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than
three weeks, we recommend that you take the
following steps to minimize the drain on your
vehicle's battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out
of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or
more, run the air conditioning system at idle
for about five minutes in the fresh air and
high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according
to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals
that make roads passable in snow and ice and
those that are sprayed on trees and road
surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather
and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations
will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from
the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or
removal of paint and protective coatings from
your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation
Stone and gravel impact
Insects, tree sap and tar
Salt in the air near seacoast localities
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass
headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures
must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive
material to clean the lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash
your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car
Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the
panels completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to
remove.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 332
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 333
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as
Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
stains and to protect your paint finish. Use
precautions to not scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin
out the paint finish.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar-
riage at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and
trunk be kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in
the paint, touch them up immediately.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision
or similar cause that destroys the paint and
protective coating, have your vehicle repaired
as soon as possible.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric
upholstery and carpeting.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will
weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a
soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn
or if the buckles do not work properly.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning
materials such as steel wool or scouring
powder that will scratch metal and painted
surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable,
and if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent
retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
8
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 333
334 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
may be used, but do not use high alcohol
content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used,
wipe clean with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a
soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
The leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small
particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and
damage the leather upholstery and should be
removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and
Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to
avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning
fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based
cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather
is designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recom-
mends Mopar total care leather cleaner applied
on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution
when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped
with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the
elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using.
Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani-
tizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated
surfaces of the interior may cause perma-
nent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean
leather upholstery, as damage to the
upholstery may result.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 334
21_WD_OM_EN_USC
FIRST EDITION
2021 DODGE DURANGO OWNER’S MANUAL
©2020 FCA US LLC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. TOUS DROITS RÉSERVÉS.
DODGE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF FCA US LLC OR FCA CANADA INC., USED UNDER LICENSE. DODGE EST UNE MARQUE DÉPOSÉE DE FCA US LLC OU FCA CANADA INC., UTILISÉE SOUS LE PERMIS.
APP STORE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF APPLE INC. GOOGLE PLAY STORE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF GOOGLE.
Whether it’s providing information about specic product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an
accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll nd the app an important extension of your Dodge brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search
keyword “Dodge” (U.S. residents only).
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE
OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS
U. S. Canada
2021 DODGE DURANGO
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to
chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the
engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently
when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include
a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its
products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-800-423-6343 (U.S.) or
1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and
Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian
residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and
personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road.
Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you nd yourself
unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of
cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Dodge brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source
for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local
Dodge brand dealer.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels
far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use
public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
335
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found
on a label located on the left front corner of the
instrument panel pad, visible from outside of
the vehicle through the windshield.
Windshield VIN Label Location
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will be
some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You
may notice increased pedal travel during
application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the Brake
Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason
(i.e., repeated brake applications with the
engine off) the brakes will still function.
However, the effort required to brake the
vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed
and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/
bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a six sided (hex)
deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Base Model Vehicle
**Use only authorized dealer recommended
lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or
oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
130 Ft-Lbs
(176 N·m)
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
9
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 335
336 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/
bolt (do not insert it half way).
NOTE:
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by an
authorized dealer or service station.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly tightened.
Torque Patterns
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see a dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with a lower than recommended
octane number can cause engine failure and
may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as
hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand of
gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
3.6L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends
greater than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
optimum fuel economy and performance when
using high quality unleaded “Regular” gasoline
having a posted octane number of 87 as
specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of
higher octane “Premium” gasoline is not
required, as it will not provide any benefit over
“Regular” gasoline in these engines.
5.7L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends
greater than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and
performance when using high-quality
unleaded gasoline having an octane range of
87 to 89 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method.
The use of 89 octane “Plus” gasoline is
recommended for optimum performance and
fuel economy.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
“reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated
gasoline contains oxygenates and are
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow
this warning may result in personal injury.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 336
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 337
specifically blended to reduce vehicle
emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is
recommended. Properly blended reformulated
gasoline will provide improved performance
and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain
detergents, corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle
performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline contains a higher level of
detergents to further aide in
minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these
materials intended for gum and varnish
removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
GASOLINE /OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline
with oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of FCA and may void the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with
gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15).
Use of gasoline with higher ethanol content may
void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of
these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion.
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid
Propane (LP) may result in damage to the
engine, emissions, and fuel system
components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of FCA and
may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing
methanol, or gasoline containing more than
15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may
result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe
pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
9
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 337
338 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
M
ANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) IN
G
ASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic
additive that is blended into some gasoline to
increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT
provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emissions system
performance in some vehicles. FCA
recommends that gasoline without MMT be
used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline
pump; therefore, you should ask your gasoline
retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT.
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions
control system can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can
impair engine performance and damage
the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or igni-
tion malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a
pungent burning odor or some light smoke,
your engine may be out of tune or malfunc-
tioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service
assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now
being sold as octane enhancers, is not
recommended. Most of these products
contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsi-
bility of FCA and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 338
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 339
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L and 5.7L Engines 24.6 Gallons 93.0 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
5.7L Engine 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine – Without Trailer Tow
Package
10.4 Quarts 9.9 Liters
3.6L Engine – With Trailer Tow
Package
11 Quarts 10.4 Liters
5.7L Engine – Without Trailer Tow
Package
15.4 Quarts 14.6 Liters
5.7L Engine – With Trailer Tow
Package
16 Quarts 15.2 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
9
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 339
340 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar,
Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equivalent. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar,
Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equivalent. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter
We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar Engine Oil
Filter is unavailable only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36
Filter Performance Requirements.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable (R+M)/2 Method,
0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 340
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 341
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use Shell Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Transfer Case – 5.7L Engine We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Axle Differential (Front-Rear)
We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE
75W-85.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703.
9
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 341
342
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by
the warranty. Discuss additional charges with
the service manager. Keep a maintenance log
of your vehicle's service history. This can often
provide a clue to the current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or
the specific work you want done. If you've had
an accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the
items in order of priority. At many authorized
dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
(additional charges may apply). If you need a
rental, it is advisable to make these
arrangements when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to
be happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an
authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that
you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer.
They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. FCA US LLC’s authorized dealers have
the facilities, factory-trained technicians,
special tools, and the latest information to
ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an
authorized dealer’s service manager first. If for
some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to
the general manager or owner of the authorized
dealer. They want to know if you need
assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to
resolve the concern, you may contact the FCA
US LLC's Customer Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC’s customer
center should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile,
and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC C USTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 423-6343
FCA C ANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800)
387-9983 French
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 342
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 343
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US
V
IRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (800) 423-6343
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing
difficulties, FCA US LLC has installed special
Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf (TDD)
equipment at its customer center. Any hearing
or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY)
in the United States, can communicate with FCA
US LLC by dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs
relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice
callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for
a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost
of unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar
Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle
extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide
additional protection beyond your vehicle’s
warranty. If you purchased a Mopar Vehicle
Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
If you have any questions about the service
contract, call FCA US LLC’s Service Contract
National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922
(Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001
English / (800) 387-9983 French).
10
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 343
344 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the
FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those
documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable
to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.mopar.com/om for further information.
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar original equipment parts & accessories
and factory filled fluids are available from an
authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle to keep it operating at its best and
maintain its original condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON , D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit,
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 344
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 345
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use
either the website or the phone numbers listed
below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide
a complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components and is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations.
These manuals make it easy to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle
systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems, using step-by-step
troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all
tools and equipment.
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared
with the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US
LLC vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om
To order a hard copy of your Owner’s
Information, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US)
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
10
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 345
346 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 346
347
INDEX
WARRANTY INFORMATION ......................344
A
About Your Brakes
.........................................335
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(Cruise Control)
.................................... 127 , 130
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............297
Adding Fuel ....................................................151
Additives, Fuel ...............................................337
Adjust
Down
.................................................... 37 , 38
Forward ................................................ 37 , 38
Rearward.............................................. 37 , 38
Up......................................................... 37 , 38
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation
......................................227
Air Bag Warning Light ...................... 225 , 228
Driver Knee Air Bag ...................................232
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 236, 278
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................278
Front Air Bag .............................................228
If Deployment Occurs ............................... 235
Knee Impact Bolsters ............................... 232
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .............. 237
Maintenance ............................................ 237
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ............. 226
Side Air Bags ............................................ 232
Transporting Pets ..................................... 254
Air Bag Light.................................. 95 , 225, 254
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) .. 287
Air Conditioner Maintenance ........................ 288
Air Conditioner Refrigerant .................. 288 , 289
Air Conditioner System ................................. 288
Air Conditioning
Rear.............................................................62
Air Conditioning Filter .................... 65 , 288, 289
Air Conditioning System ...................................64
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......................64
Air Filter ........................................................ 287
Air Pressure
Tires
......................................................... 320
Alarm
Arm The System
....................................22 , 23
Disarm The System ......................................22
Rearm The System ......................................23
Security Alarm .............................................98
Alarm System
Security Alarm
.............................................22
All Wheel Drive (AWD) ................................... 120
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle .........................................................10
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .................. 297 , 339
Disposal .................................................... 298
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ....................... 200
Anti-Lock Warning Light ................................ 101
Assist, Hill Start ............................................. 205
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................. 171
Auto Down Power Windows ..............................74
Automatic Headlights .......................................52
Automatic High Beams .....................................51
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..............64
11
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 347
348
Automatic Transmission
...................... 106 , 114
Adding Fluid ..............................................300
Fluid And Filter Change .............................300
Fluid Change .............................................300
Fluid Level Check ......................................300
Fluid Type ........................................ 301 , 341
Special Additives .......................................300
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode ...118
Auxiliary Driving Systems ...............................206
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) .......... 70
Auxiliary Power Outlet ...................................... 70
Axle Fluid .......................................................341
B
Battery
....................................................96 , 285
Charging System Light ................................. 96
Keyless Key Fob Replacement .................... 15
Battery Saver Feature ......................................53
Belts, Seat .....................................................254
Blind Spot Monitoring ....................................206
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................291
B-Pillar Location .............................................316
Brake Assist System ......................................201
Brake Control System, Electronic ..................201
Brake Fluid .......................................... 299 , 341
Brake System ...................................... 299 , 335
Anti-Lock (ABS) ......................................... 335
Fluid Check ............................................... 299
Master Cylinder ........................................ 299
Parking ..................................................... 111
Warning Light ..............................................95
Brake/Transmission Interlock ...................... 114
Bulb Replacement ............................... 309 , 311
Bulbs, Light ................................................... 256
C
Camera, Rear
................................................ 149
Capacities, Fluid ........................................... 339
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine)
............................................... 283
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ..................... 298
Car Washes................................................... 332
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............................ 256
Cargo Area Cover ......................................79 , 80
Cargo Compartment ........................................79
Light ............................................................79
Luggage Carrier ...........................................81
Cargo Light.......................................................79
Cargo Tie-Downs ..............................................80
Cellular Phone .............................................. 199
Center High Mounted Stop Light ................... 311
Certification Label ......................................... 151
Chains, Tire ................................................... 328
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................................... 313
Check Engine Light (Malfunction
Indicator Light)
.............................................. 104
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety .................. 254
Checks, Safety .............................................. 254
Child Restraint .............................................. 238
Child Restraints
Booster Seats
........................................... 241
Child Seat Installation ............................... 251
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt ..... 249
Infant And Child Restraints ....................... 240
Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............. 245
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .. 242
Older Children And Child Restraints .......... 240
Seating Positions ...................................... 242
Child Safety Locks ............................................27
Clean Air Gasoline ......................................... 336
Cleaning
Wheels
...................................................... 327
Climate Control ................................................57
Automatic ....................................................57
Cold Weather Operation ................................ 110
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 325
Contract, Service ........................................... 343
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 298
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 348
349
Cooling System
..............................................296
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .......................297
Cooling Capacity ........................................339
Disposal Of Used Coolant ..........................298
Drain, Flush, And Refill ..............................297
Inspection .................................................297
Points To Remember .................................299
Pressure Cap .............................................298
Radiator Cap .............................................298
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze)
........................ 297 , 339, 340
Corrosion Protection ......................................332
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ... 127, 128, 130
Cruise Light ......................................... 102 , 103
Customer Assistance .....................................342
Cybersecurity .................................................171
D
Daytime Running Lights ...................................51
Defroster, Windshield ....................................254
De-Icer, Remote Start ......................................21
Diagnostic System, Onboard .........................103
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine)
................................................285
Disabled Vehicle Towing ................................275
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)
.......................298
Door Ajar ...................................................96 , 97
Door Ajar Light ..........................................96 , 97
Door Locks ................................................23 , 27
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors ....27
Doors ...............................................................23
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ......................................31
Driving .......................................................... 168
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) .... 189
E
Economy (Fuel) Mode
................................... 114
Electric Brake Control System ....................... 201
Anti-Lock Brake System ............................ 200
Electronic Roll Mitigation ................. 202 , 206
Electric Remote Mirrors ...................................45
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .........70
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..... 128
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .................. 202
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .........96
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case ............. 120
Emergency Gas Can Refueling ...................... 271
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ..................... 274
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 257
Jacking ..................................................... 261
Jump Starting ........................................... 268
Emission Control System Maintenance ........ 104
Engine ........................................................... 283
Air Cleaner ................................................ 287
Block Heater ............................................. 110
Break-In Recommendations ..................... 110
Checking Oil Level .................................... 285
Compartment ..................................283 , 284
Compartment Identification ............. 283 , 284
Cooling...................................................... 296
Exhaust Gas Caution ................................ 256
Fails To Start ............................................. 109
Flooded, Starting ...................................... 109
Fuel Requirements ..........................336 , 339
Jump Starting ........................................... 268
Oil .................................................... 286 , 339
Oil Filler Cap ............................................. 283
Oil Filter .................................................... 287
Oil Selection............................286 , 339, 340
Oil Synthetic .............................................. 287
Overheating .............................................. 271
Starting ..................................................... 106
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ... 236 , 278
Ethanol.......................................................... 337
Exhaust Gas Cautions ................................... 256
Exhaust System ...................................256 , 295
Exterior Lights ............................... 50 , 256, 309
11
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 349
350
F
Filters
Air Cleaner
.................................................287
Air Conditioning .........................65 , 288, 289
Engine Oil ..................................................287
Engine Oil Disposal ...................................287
Flashers.........................................................257
Hazard Warning .........................................257
Turn Signals ........................... 102 , 256, 311
Flash-To-Pass .................................................. 51
Flooded Engine Starting ................................109
Fluid Capacities .............................................339
Fluid Leaks ....................................................256
Fluid Level Checks
Brake
........................................................299
Engine Oil ..................................................285
Fluids And Lubricants ....................................341
Fog Lights ......................................................311
Fog Lights, Service .........................................311
Fold-Flat Seats ................................................. 31
Folding Rear Seats .......................................... 33
Forward Collision Warning .............................210
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ...............................257
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .................................274
Front Axle (Differential) ..................................301
Fuel............................................................... 336
Additives ................................................... 337
Clean Air ................................................... 336
Economy Mode ......................................... 114
Ethanol ..................................................... 337
Gasoline ................................................... 336
Materials Added ....................................... 337
Methanol .................................................. 337
Octane Rating ........................................... 336
Requirements .................................. 336 , 339
Specifications ........................................... 340
Tank Capacity ........................................... 339
Fueling .......................................................... 151
Fuses ............................................................ 302
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)
.....................46
Gasoline, (Fuel) ............................................. 336
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................ 336
Gasoline, Reformulated ................................ 336
Gear Ranges ................................................. 115
Glass Cleaning .............................................. 334
Gross Axle Weight Rating .............................. 153
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......................... 153
GVWR............................................................ 151
H
Hazard Warning Flashers .............................. 257
Head Restraints ...............................................40
Headlights
Automatic
....................................................52
Cleaning.................................................... 332
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........51
Lights On Reminder .....................................52
On With Wipers ............................................52
Passing ........................................................51
Heated Mirrors .................................................46
Heated Seats ...................................................39
Heated Steering Wheel ....................................29
Heater, Engine Block ..................................... 110
Hill Start Assist .............................................. 205
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................................... 155
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .....................46
Hood Prop ........................................................77
Hood Release ...................................................77
I
Ignition .............................................................17
Key Fob Battery Low Or Dead ......................17
Key Fob Not Detected ..................................17
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 350
351
Keyless Ignition
........................................... 17
Keyless Push Button ................................... 17
Push Button Ignition .................................... 17
Switch ......................................................... 17
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) .................................. 16
Inside Rearview Mirror ............................44 , 257
Instrument Cluster ........................................... 85
Descriptions ..............................................102
Display ................................................. 86 , 87
Menu Items ................................................. 90
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ....................334
Integrated Trailer Brake Control ....................160
Interior And Instrument Lights ......................... 53
Interior Appearance Care ...............................333
Interior Lights .................................................. 53
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) .................. 55
Inverter
Power
.......................................................... 72
iPod/USB/MP3 Control ...................................69
J
Jack Location
.................................................262
Jack Operation ...............................................264
Jacking And Tire Changing Instructions .........261
Jacking Instructions .......................................264
Jump Starting ................................................268
K
Key Fob............................................................14
Arm The System ..........................................22
Disarm The System .....................................22
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............16
Key Fob Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................................15
Key Fob Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................................16
Keyless Enter 'n Go
Passive Entry
...............................................24
Passive Entry Programming .........................24
Keys.................................................................14
Replacement ...............................................16
Sentry (Immobilizer) ....................................16
L
Lane Change Assist
.........................................53
LaneSense .................................................... 146
Lap/Shoulder Belts ....................................... 218
Latches ......................................................... 256
Hood............................................................77
Lead Free Gasoline ....................................... 336
Leaks, Fluid .................................................. 256
Life Of Tires ................................................... 323
Liftgate ............................................................78
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer .......................57
Light Bulbs .................................................... 256
Lights ............................................................ 256
Air Bag ...................................... 95 , 225, 254
Automatic Headlights ..................................52
Brake Assist Warning ................................ 204
Brake Warning .............................................95
Bulb Replacement ........................... 309 , 311
Cargo ...........................................................79
Center Mounted Stop ............................... 311
Cruise ..............................................102 , 103
Daytime Running .........................................51
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...........................50
Electronic Stability Program(ESP) Indicator ....97
Exterior .............................................. 50 , 256
Fog............................................................ 311
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 257
Headlights On With Wipers ..........................52
High Beam/Low Beam Select ......................51
Interior .........................................................53
Lights On Reminder .....................................52
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..........98
Park ................................................... 52 , 102
Passing ........................................................51
Reading .......................................................53
Rear Servicing .......................................... 311
Rear Tail Lamps ........................................ 311
Seat Belt Reminder .....................................95
Security Alarm .............................................98
Service............................................. 309 , 311
11
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 351
352
Side Marker
...............................................311
Traction Control .........................................204
Turn Signals .................... 50 , 102, 256, 311
Vanity Mirror ................................................ 45
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions
...................................97 , 102
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode ....................... 93
Load Shed Battery Saver On ............................ 93
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction .............. 93
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor .............. 93
Loading Vehicle .............................................151
Tires ..........................................................316
Locks
Child Protection ........................................... 27
Manual ........................................................ 23
Power Door.................................................. 24
Lubrication, Body ...........................................291
Lug Nuts/Bolts ..............................................335
Luggage Carrier ............................................... 81
M
Maintenance
................................................... 77
Maintenance Free Battery .............................285
Maintenance Schedule ..................................279
Malfunction Indicator Light
(Check Engine) .......................................98 , 104
Manual
Service ......................................................345
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) ....................29
Memory Seat ...................................................29
Memory Seats And Radio .................................29
Methanol ...................................................... 337
Mirrors .............................................................44
Electric Remote ...........................................45
Exterior Folding ............................................45
Heated.........................................................46
Outside ........................................................45
Rearview.............................................44 , 257
Vanity ..........................................................45
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle
.........................................................10
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...................... 213
Mopar Parts .................................................. 344
Multi-Function Control Lever ............................50
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period ......................... 110
O
Occupant Restraints
..................................... 216
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..................... 336
Oil Change Indicator ........................................88
Reset ...........................................................88
Oil Filter, Change .......................................... 287
Oil Filter, Selection ........................................ 287
Oil Pressure Light .............................................97
Oil, Engine ..................................................... 286
Capacity .................................................... 339
Checking ................................................... 285
Dipstick..................................................... 285
Disposal .................................................... 287
Filter ......................................................... 287
Filter Disposal ........................................... 287
Identification Logo .................................... 287
Materials Added To ................................... 287
Pressure Warning Light ................................97
Recommendation ............................286 , 339
Synthetic................................................... 287
Viscosity.................................................... 339
Onboard Diagnostic System .......................... 103
Operating Precautions .................................. 103
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual ........................................ 345
Outside Rearview Mirrors .................................45
Overheating, Engine ...................................... 271
P
Paint Care
..................................................... 332
Parking Brake ............................................... 111
ParkSense System, Rear ............................... 140
Passive Entry....................................................24
Pets............................................................... 254
Pinch Protection ...............................................76
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 316
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 352
353
Power
Brakes
.......................................................335
Distribution Center (Fuses) .......................303
Door Locks .................................................. 24
Inverter........................................................ 72
Liftgate ........................................................78
Mirrors......................................................... 45
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ................ 70
Seats ........................................................... 36
Steering........................................... 125 , 341
Sunroof ....................................................... 75
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ...............28
Windows...................................................... 74
Power Seats
Down
.................................................... 37 , 38
Forward ................................................ 37 , 38
Rearward.............................................. 37 , 38
Up......................................................... 37 , 38
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ...................222
Preparation For Jacking .................................261
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..................................................222
R
Radial Ply Tires
..............................................321
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............298
Radio Operation ............................................199
Radio Remote Controls ..................................189
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ........................... 56
Rear Air Conditioning ....................................... 62
Rear Axle (Differential) .................................. 301
Rear Camera................................................. 149
Rear Cross Path ............................................ 209
Rear ParkSense System ............................... 140
Rear Seats, Folding ..........................................33
Rear Wiper/Washer .........................................57
Reclining Front Seats .......................................32
Recreational Towing ..................................... 164
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) ..... 166
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) ....167
Reformulated Gasoline ................................. 336
Refrigerant .................................................... 289
Release, Hood .................................................77
Reminder, Seat Belt ...................................... 218
Remote Control
Starting System
...........................................19
Remote Keyless Entry ......................................14
Arm The Alarm .............................................22
Disarm The Alarm ........................................22
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............16
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control ......... 189
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode
..............................20
Remote Starting System ..................................19
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 309
Replacement Keys ...........................................16
Replacement Tires ........................................ 323
Reporting Safety Defects .............................. 344
Restraints, Child ........................................... 238
Restraints, Head ..............................................40
Retractable Cargo Area Cover ..........................80
Roll Over Warning ..............................................9
Roof Type Carrier .............................................81
Rotation, Tires ............................................... 330
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle
........................ 254
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...................... 255
Safety Defects, Reporting ............................. 344
Safety Information, Tire ................................. 311
Safety Tips .................................................... 254
Safety, Exhaust Gas ...................................... 256
Schedule, Maintenance ................................ 279
Seat Belt Reminder ..........................................95
Seat Belts ............................................217 , 254
Adjustable Shoulder Belt .......................... 221
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 221
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage .. 221
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ........... 223
Child Restraints ........................................ 238
Energy Management Feature ................... 223
Extender ................................................... 222
Front Seat ...............................217 , 218, 220
Inspection ................................................. 254
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................... 220
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................... 221
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................................... 218
Operating Instructions .............................. 220
Pregnant Women ...................................... 222
Pretensioners ........................................... 222
11
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 353
354
Rear Seat
..................................................218
Reminder ..................................................218
Seat Belt Extender ....................................222
Seat Belt Pretensioner ..............................222
Untwisting Procedure ................................221
Seat Belts Maintenance ................................333
Seats ................................... 31 , 36, 37, 38, 39
Adjustment .................................... 31 , 37, 38
Easy Entry ................................................... 37
Heated ........................................................ 39
Memory ....................................................... 29
Rear Folding ......................................... 31 , 33
Reclining ..................................................... 32
Seatback Release ....................................... 31
Tilting .......................................................... 31
Vented......................................................... 40
Ventilated .................................................... 40
Security Alarm
Arm The System .......................................... 22
Disarm The System ..................................... 22
Security System ........................................22 , 98
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..................................16
Sentry Key Replacement .................................16
Service Assistance ........................................ 342
Service Contract ........................................... 343
Service Manuals ........................................... 345
Shifting ......................................................... 112
Automatic Transmission .................. 112 , 114
Shoulder Belts .............................................. 218
Signals, Turn ...............................102 , 256, 311
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 328
Snow Tires .................................................... 325
Spare Tires .................................262 , 325, 326
Spark Plugs .......................................... 340 , 341
Speed Control
Accel/Decel
..................................... 128 , 129
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ............................. 134
Cancel ...................................................... 129
Resume .................................................... 129
Set............................................................ 128
Speed Control (Cruise Control) .............128, 130
Starting ......................................................... 106
Button..........................................................17
Cold Weather ............................................ 110
Engine Block Heater ................................. 110
Engine Fails To Start ................................. 109
Remote ........................................................19
Starting And Operating .................................. 106
Starting Procedures ...................................... 106
Steering ...........................................................28
Power........................................................ 125
Tilt Column...................................................28
Wheel, Heated .............................................29
Wheel, Tilt ....................................................28
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...................... 189
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls ............................................ 189
Storage ............................................................66
Storage, Vehicle ..................................... 65 , 332
Storing Your Vehicle ...................................... 332
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 354
355
Sun Roof
................................................... 75 , 77
Sun Visor ......................................................... 45
Sunglasses Storage ......................................... 67
Sunshade Operation ........................................ 76
Sway Control, Trailer ......................................206
Synthetic Engine Oil .......................................287
System
Vehicle Security
........................................... 22
System, Remote Starting ................................. 19
T
Telescoping Steering Column
.......................... 28
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ............ 64
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo .................................... 80
Tilt Steering Column ........................................ 28
Tire And Loading Information Placard ...........316
Tire Markings .................................................311
Tire Safety Information ..................................311
Tires...................................255 , 320, 325, 331
Aging (Life Of Tires) ...................................323
Air Pressure ...............................................320
Chains .......................................................328
Changing ...................................................261
Compact Spare .........................................325
General Information ........................ 320 , 325
High Speed ............................................... 321
Inflation Pressure ..................................... 320
Life Of Tires .............................................. 323
Load Capacity .................................. 316 , 317
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ..99, 213
Quality Grading ......................................... 331
Radial ....................................................... 321
Replacement ............................................ 323
Rotation.................................................... 330
Safety .............................................. 311 , 320
Sizes......................................................... 313
Snow Tires ................................................ 325
Spare Tires .............................262 , 325, 326
Spinning ................................................... 322
Trailer Towing ........................................... 159
Tread Wear Indicators .............................. 323
Wheel Nut Torque ..................................... 335
To Open Hood ..................................................77
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...................... 157
Tow N Go ...................................................... 123
Towing ................................................. 152 , 275
Disabled Vehicle ....................................... 275
Guide........................................................ 156
Recreational ............................................. 164
Weight ...................................................... 156
Towing Behind A Motorhome ........................ 164
Traction Control ............................................ 206
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ............................. 206
Trailer Towing ................................................ 152
Hitches ..................................................... 155
Minimum Requirements ........................... 158
Tips ........................................................... 163
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................ 157
Wiring ....................................................... 161
Trailer Towing Guide ..................................... 156
Trailer Weight ................................................ 156
Transfer Case ................................................ 301
Electronically Shifted ................................ 120
Fluid.......................................................... 341
Maintenance ............................................ 301
Transmission................................................. 114
Automatic ........................................ 114 , 300
Fluid.......................................................... 341
Maintenance ............................................ 300
Shifting ..................................................... 112
Transporting Pets .......................................... 254
Tread Wear Indicators ................................... 323
Turn Signals .........................................102 , 311
11
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 355
356
U
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features
...... 24, 27
Passive Entry Programming .................. 24, 27
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ...........................331
Unleaded Gasoline ........................................336
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ....................221
V
Vanity Mirrors ..................................................45
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ...............335
Vehicle Loading ................................... 151 , 317
Vehicle Maintenance .....................................286
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations .................... 10
Vehicle Security System .................................. 22
Vehicle Storage ......................................65 , 332
Voice Command .............................................. 43
Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................ 43
W
Warning Flashers, Hazard ............................. 257
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions)....................................................99
Warnings, Roll Over ........................................... 9
Warranty Information .................................... 344
WARRANTY INFORMATION ¹ ......................... 344
Washers, Windshield ..............................55 , 285
Washing Vehicle ........................................... 332
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .......................... 327
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 327
Wind Buffeting .................................................75
Window Fogging ...............................................65
Windows ..........................................................74
Power...........................................................74
Reset Auto-Up ..............................................75
Windshield Defroster .................................... 254
Windshield Washers .............................. 55 , 285
Fluid.......................................................... 285
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 292
Windshield Wipers ...........................................55
Wipers Blade Replacement ........................... 292
Wipers, Intermittent .........................................55
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .....................................56
Wireless Charging Pad .....................................73
21_WD_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 356
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to
chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the
engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently
when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include
a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its
products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-800-423-6343 (U.S.) or
1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and
Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian
residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and
personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road.
Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you nd yourself
unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of
cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Dodge brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source
for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local
Dodge brand dealer.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels
far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use
public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
21_WD_OM_EN_USC
FIRST EDITION
2021 DODGE DURANGO OWNER’S MANUAL
©2020 FCA US LLC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. TOUS DROITS RÉSERVÉS.
DODGE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF FCA US LLC OR FCA CANADA INC., USED UNDER LICENSE. DODGE EST UNE MARQUE DÉPOSÉE DE FCA US LLC OU FCA CANADA INC., UTILISÉE SOUS LE PERMIS.
APP STORE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF APPLE INC. GOOGLE PLAY STORE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF GOOGLE.
Whether it’s providing information about specic product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an
accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll nd the app an important extension of your Dodge brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search
keyword “Dodge” (U.S. residents only).
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE
OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS
U. S. Canada
2021 DODGE DURANGO
